JP6742056B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot machine or a pachinko machine.

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) in place of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

JP-A-6-35066 JP, 2009-240459, A

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may become unclear due to thermal deformation of the image, or the focus may be out of focus even if the focus is adjusted. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing image quality deterioration due to temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort in images.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine provided with a projection device capable of projecting an image (for example, the projector device B2 and the like) and identification information display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (for example, reels RL, RC, RR, main display window DD4 and the like). (For example, a gaming machine 1 or the like),
The projection device is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210),
Temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the temperature near a predetermined location,
A focus control unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, or the like) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit,
When the number of times that the identification information is variably displayed by the identification information display unit reaches a predetermined number, the focus control unit temporarily returns the focus position of the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference position and then detects the temperature by the temperature detection unit. The focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature that has been set.

According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even if the temperature of the projection apparatus changes, and further, the drift error accumulated for each drift correction is focused when the number of times that the identification information is fluctuated and displayed reaches a predetermined number. Since the position is removed by returning to the predetermined reference position, the image quality deterioration of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing image quality deterioration due to temperature change of the projection device and eliminating discomfort in images.

It is a front perspective view of a game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the gaming machine. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the gaming machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is an upper perspective view of a projector apparatus. It is a perspective view when a display unit is attached to a cabinet. It is a lower perspective view of a projector device. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a left exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is a right exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is a rear perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a reel screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a projector device. It is the whole projector device perspective view. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the projector device. It is a figure which shows the lens unit of a projector apparatus. FIG. 3 is a plan view showing an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal for fixing the projector device. FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view of an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal taken along the line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. 25. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of an upper side pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the attitude|position adjustment method of a lower pedestal. It is a figure which shows the connection form of a projector apparatus and adjustment PC. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a case of the projector device. It is a perspective view showing a state in which a heat sink and an optical element are arranged in a case of the projector device. It is a figure for explaining an air channel formed in a case of a projector device. It is a front view which shows the inside of a cabinet. It is a side view of the cabinet in the state where the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened. It is an exploded perspective view of a lower door mechanism. It is a block diagram showing a system configuration of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a main control board. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a sub-control board. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a reel drive substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a door relay board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a sub relay board. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a scaler substrate. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a multi-output scaler LSI. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a sub liquid crystal I/F substrate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the split display pattern of a projector apparatus and a sub liquid crystal display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 1 of a division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 2 of a division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 3 of a division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 4 of a division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 5 of a division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 6 of a division display pattern. It is an explanatory view for explaining communication specifications of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a scaler board|substrate and a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between the sub liquid crystal I/F board|substrate and a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a projector control board-sub control board. It is a figure which shows the error information transmitted as a command from each board|substrate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of adjustment PC. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of power supply supply of a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process of a main control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 1 of a sub-control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 2 of a sub-control board. 8 is a flowchart showing a process when the sub control board is powered on. It is a flowchart which shows the LED control task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the screen accessory control task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the screen accessory control process of a sub-control board. 7 is a flowchart showing focus change request processing of the sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of a sub-control board. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the subdevice task of a subcontrol board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub device reception interruption process of a sub control board. It is a flow chart which shows subdevice initialization processing of a subcontrol board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler control process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a scaler control reception of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a scaler start-up parameter request reception of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler setting change process of a sub-control board. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of receiving a scaler status command of a sub-control board. It is a flow chart which shows a scaler reception confirmation reception time process of a sub-control board. It is a flow chart which shows sub liquid crystal control processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of sub-liquid crystal control reception of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the sub liquid crystal starting parameter request of the sub control board. It is a flow chart which shows sub liquid crystal setting change processing of a sub control board. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of receiving a sub liquid crystal status command of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of reception confirmation of sub liquid crystal reception of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control process of a sub-control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a process upon receiving a projector control of the sub control board. 9 is a flowchart showing a process of receiving a projector activation parameter request of the sub control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a projector setting change process of the sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector reception confirmation reception time process of a sub-control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a process of receiving a projector error notification of the sub control board. 8 is a flowchart showing a process of receiving a projector status of the sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector drift correction process of a sub-control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 1 of a scaler board|substrate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 2 of a scaler board|substrate. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a scaler board. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st serial line reception interruption processing of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of a scaler board|substrate. It is a flow chart which shows sub device bypass transmission processing of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of reception between the sub-control of a scaler board and a scaler. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of transmission between the sub-control of a scaler board and a scaler. It is a flow chart which shows sub-control bypass transmission processing of a scaler board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of a projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a projector control main process of the projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a serial line reception interrupt process of the projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing an initialization process of a projector control board. 6 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of reception between the sub-control of the projector control board and the projector. 7 is a flowchart showing an internal setting change process of the projector control board. 8 is a flowchart showing a projector setting value storage process of the projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a self-diagnosis process of the projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a process during transmission between the sub-control of the projector control board and the projector. 7 is a flowchart showing a status transmission data creation process of the projector control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of a sub liquid crystal I/F substrate. It is a flow chart which shows sub liquid crystal control main processing of a sub liquid crystal I/F board. It is a flow chart which shows a serial line reception interruption processing of a sub liquid crystal I/F board. It is a flow chart which shows initialization processing of a sub liquid crystal I/F board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the sub control of a sub liquid crystal I/F board-sub liquid crystal reception. It is a flow chart which shows self-diagnosis processing of a sub liquid crystal I/F board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-liquid crystal I/F substrate sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process. It is a figure which shows the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment of a projector apparatus. It is a figure which shows the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment of a projector apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view showing the 1st modification of a projector device. It is an exploded perspective view showing the 2nd modification of a projector device. It is a front view which shows the arrangement form of the projector apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the projector apparatus applied to the modification after the 4th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control main process of the projector control board which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of the projector control board which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a figure which shows the LED temperature control table and FAN temperature control table with which the projector control board which concerns on a 4th modification was equipped. It is a figure which shows the FAN temperature control table with which the projector control board which concerns on a 5th modification was equipped. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving the projector error notification of the sub-control board concerning a 6th modification. It is a figure which shows the FAN temperature rotation speed control table with which the projector control board which concerns on a 7th modification was equipped. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of transmission between the sub-control of a projector control board concerning a 8th modification, and a projector. It is a flowchart which shows the projector initialization process of the projector control board which concerns on an 8th modification. It is a flow chart which shows the projector control processing of the sub control board concerning the 9th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of projector control reception of the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on a 10th modification. It is a flow chart which shows projector drift amendment processing of a sub-control board concerning the 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting change process of the sub-control board which concerns on a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment instruction|indication transmission process of the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control process of the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment determination process of the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process of the sub-control board which concerns on an 11th modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image projected by the projector apparatus which concerns on an 11th modification. It is a flow chart which shows the production contents decision processing of the sub-control board concerning the 12th modification. It is a flow chart which shows the production contents decision processing of the sub-control board concerning the 13th modification. It is a figure which shows the drift correction temperature table with which the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on a 14th modification is provided. It is a flow chart which shows projector drift amendment processing of the sub-control board concerning the 14th modification. It is a figure which shows the drift correction temperature table with which the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on a 15th modification is equipped. It is a flow chart which shows the demo command transmission processing of the main control board concerning the 15th modification. It is a figure for explaining the change of the game state concerning the 16th modification. It is a figure which shows the focus adjustment frequency setting table with which the sub-control board which concerns on a 17th modification was equipped. It is a flow chart which shows the production contents decision processing of the sub-control board concerning the 17th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment determination process of the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on an 18th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of starting of the projector apparatus and sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of starting of the projector apparatus and sub CPU concerning a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of the normal operation of the projector apparatus and sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of normal operation of the projector apparatus and the sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of screen switching of the projector apparatus and sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of screen switching of the projector apparatus and sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a flow chart which shows the main control main processing performed in the main control board of the pachinko machine concerning the 20th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interruption process performed in the main control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on a 20th modification.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the gaming machine 1 is a so-called pachi-slot machine. The gaming machine 1 can be played using a game medium such as a coin, a medal, a game ball, or a token, and a card such as a card that stores information on a game value that is or is given to a player. In the following description, it is assumed that a medal is used.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 to the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction), The right side and the left side as viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. A direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-back direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-back direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the vertical direction or the height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 is configured by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 is a gaming machine main body and has a cabinet G made of metal having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on the upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower part arranged on the lower front part of the cabinet G. And a door mechanism DD.

Further, in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G, two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction are formed at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so that the upper and lower portions of the opening in the cabinet G can be closed. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 at the center. A transparent panel UD11 that transmits light is provided in the upper display window UD1.

The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening in the upper substantially central portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each. These reels RL, RC, RR are arranged in parallel (in one horizontal row) so that they can rotate in the vertical direction at a constant speed. The reels RL, RC, RR allow the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR to be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, DD2c having substantially horizontal surfaces are formed. The first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal insertion slot DD5 for inserting medals. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening through which a player inserts a medal. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also called a MAXBET button) as an active line setting means for betting credited medals. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of inserted medals.

A sub display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front surface side of the main display window DD4. The sub display device DD20 displays, for example, the number of paid-out medals at the time of winning a prize or the number of credited remaining medals. Since the maximum number of medals credited to the gaming machine 1 is usually 50, the number of credits of 50 or less is displayed on the sub display device DD20. In the state where the maximum number of medals, 50, is credited, the inserted medals are paid out from the medal payout opening DD14 as they are.

On the front surface side of the maximum BET button DD8, a start lever DD6 for rotating and driving the reels RL, RC, RR by a player's operation and for starting variable display of symbols in the main display window DD4 is provided. The start lever DD6 is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the sub display device DD20, three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotations of the three reels RL, RC, RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation), respectively. , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

A C/P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C/P button DD13 is for switching the credit/payout of medals that the player has won in the game by pressing a button. In the state where the payout is selected by switching the C/P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are output from the medal payout opening DD14 (cancel chute) provided in the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out and paid-out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion DD15.

A waist panel DD18 (a waist light guide plate) is arranged below the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a makeup panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, names representing various models of the gaming machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout opening DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side thereof. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information related to the game by sound such as voice and music. A sub liquid crystal display device DD19 is arranged on the right side of the main display window DD4. The sub liquid crystal display device DD19 is a so-called touch panel DD19T in which a touch sensor panel DD10T as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). Note that the touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects a part of the human body (fingertip, etc.) or contact with an electrostatic pen, and outputs a detection signal thereof, or It may be of a system that detects the contact of a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputs the detection signal, or that of another system or structure (in-cell structure, etc.). In the present embodiment, the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T can be used to perform optical adjustment of the projector device B2 described later.

The sub liquid crystal display device DD19 functions as an SUI (smart user interface), and displays game information such as the number of games as the game progresses on the display screen thereof, depending on the player. A message or an input key for requesting selection or input is displayed.

It should be noted that in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, it is possible to display, on the display screen thereof, the content (effect information) corresponding to the effect related to the game as the game progresses, for example. Further, as the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, for example, an attachment having a function as a performance accessory or a dedicated attachment such as a jog dial or a push button may be mounted. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can be omitted by allocating its function to the display unit A and the like described later. A sub liquid crystal display device different from the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 may be arranged on the left side of the main display window DD4. As such another sub liquid crystal display device, an LED substrate having a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted thereon is provided on the back side thereof, and a display panel is provided with a translucent and decorated panel so that the production can be performed. May be formed.

As shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the interior of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and houses the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire gaming machine 1, and the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is exchangeably placed on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display and a screen device C that displays an image when irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is irradiated.

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object. For example, the position (projection distance or angle Etc.) and an image generated according to the shape according to the effect information is projected, so that an advanced and powerful effect can be achieved.

The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 is composed of a projector cover B1 forming the upper part of the irradiation unit B, and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C (see FIG. 12, FIG. 13 and the like). As will be described later in detail, the screen casing C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits the irradiation light forward, and a screen device that is arranged in front of the projector device B2 and obliquely downwardly and rearly arranges the irradiation light from the projector device B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 while being externally covered by the case B22, and is arranged in the rear part of the cabinet G. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221. The case B22 has an entire upper surface opened. As a result, the lens unit B21 and the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 21) housed in the case B22 are located on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 forwards the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B (see FIG. 33) of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by the DMD 241 (Digital Micromirror Device: see FIG. 33) via a lens or the like. It is arranged so as to emit toward the mirror mechanism B3. Details of the projector device B2 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector device B2 (in the emitting direction of the irradiation light). The mirror mechanism B3 holds an optical mirror B32 by a mirror holder B31. The mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The mirror mechanism B3 is attached to the reflector holding portion B11 such that its interval can be adjusted. Thereby, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 can be finely adjusted.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 7, the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 are housed in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 that inclines upward from the rear toward the front at the front portion thereof. As shown in FIG. 8, the projector cover B1 has a horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and symmetrically arranged in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. It has the side wall parts B13 and B13. A front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward of the cabinet G (see FIG. 5). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front central portion of the upper wall portion B12 so as to project forward, and the above-described mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the projection so that the angle can be adjusted. There is.

Further, the side wall portions B13, B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding in the left-right horizontal direction from the lower end portion. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protruding portion B131a is located so as to correspond to the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet G. The distance along the left-right direction between the tips of the first protruding portions B131a protruding from the side wall portions B13, B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width of the opening of the cabinet G in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second projecting portion B131b is located so as to correspond to the space behind the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance along the left-right direction between the tips of the second protruding portions B131b protruding from the side wall portions B13, B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width of the space portion of the cabinet G. That is, the side wall portions B13, B13 are formed such that the distance between the tips of the second protrusions B131b in the left-right direction is larger than the distance between the tips of the first protrusions B131a in the left-right direction. .. Thus, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space of the cabinet G.

Further, a screw hole B131C penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at the tip of the second protrusion B131b. When fixing the projector cover B1 to the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 (see FIG. 5), screws are respectively screwed into the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 through the screw holes B131C. Further, since the protruding portions B131 horizontally project from the lower end portions of the side wall portions B13 and B13, the protruding portions B131 and the side wall portions B13 are formed on both side end portions of the projector cover B1, and the concave portions B132 are formed from the front ends thereof. Are formed continuously toward the rear.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the recess B132 and the cabinet G define a space BS. The shapes of the upper wall portion B12 and the side wall portion B13 of the projector cover B1 are such that the distance between the lower end portion of each side wall portion B13 and the tip end portion of the second protruding portion B131b protruding from this lower end portion is the second protruding portion. The front portion of the B131b is configured to be larger than the rear portion thereof (see FIG. 8). As a result, the front space of the space BS becomes larger than the rear space. Further, when the display unit A is mounted in the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the front space of the space BS at least partially overlap each other in a top view. This space BS is used as a work space for installing and fixing the game machine 1 on the island facility.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: perforated plate B15)
As shown in FIG. 10, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are made by punching a metal plate (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed on the entire surface of the perforated plate B15 in a substantially evenly dispersed manner. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side or from the upper side to the lower side of the projector device B2. The size and the number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower side position. The perforated plate B15 has an upper part B15a on the front side, an inclined part B15b on the middle side, and a lower part B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed to bend obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed so as to be bent in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

The upper side portion B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a and cover it from below with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. There is. Further, the inclined portion B15b is arranged so as to surround the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 in a top view. Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the inclination angle of the inclined portion B15b (the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane) is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface B2a1. A front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

The front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position which is arranged in an upper position which is a standby position for prohibiting the appearance of an image by irradiation light, and a front exposure position which is arranged in a lower position which is an exposure position for allowing the appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is pivotable between the position and the front position. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without any flow resistance, and a plurality of air holes exist. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and enhance the cooling effect.

Further, since the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, for example, as shown in FIG. 11, the eye position of the player located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Even if the irradiation unit B exists on the horizontal line of the part and looks up at the irradiation unit B from this line of sight position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation unit B from being viewed.

(Display unit A: screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 12, the irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. For example, as described above, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through the screw holes B131C formed in the projecting portion B131 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the display unit A can unitize the irradiation unit B and the screen device C into a single unit for handling.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms that cause an image to appear by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so that the irradiation targets can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as the plurality of screen mechanisms. The projection screens of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have different shapes in order to diversify the image expression. The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are relatively displaced with respect to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, and the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. (See FIG. 20). The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are larger and heavier than the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, driving the front screen mechanism E1 requires a larger driving force than driving the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10)
As described above, the screen device C has the box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 13, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 standing on the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 standing on the left end of the bottom plate C1. , And a back plate C4 standingly provided at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, by connecting the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 to the bottom plate C1 by screwing, the front side where the player is located and the top side where the irradiation unit B is located are open. A box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are separately molded into predetermined shapes, and predetermined functional components such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be positioned and arranged. As a result, even if the entire unit of the screen device C cannot be standardized, it is possible to standardize the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 for each plate member. Further, since it is possible to partially replace each plate member, it is possible to easily change the specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: bottom plate C1)
The bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape in a top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central placing portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right placing portion C12 and a left placing portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction with the central placing portion C11 as the center. .. These mounting portions C11, C12, C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D into the central mounting portion C11. The right mounting portion C12 mounts the right movable body base C5 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5. The left mounting portion C13 mounts the left movable body base C6 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the left movable body base C6. The right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 are three-dimensionally formed with concaves and convexes on the inner side surfaces in the left-right direction. That is, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 also function as decorative members. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 can be positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

Further, the front portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front portion C14. The front portion C14 comes into contact with the front surface of the intermediate support plate G1 when the display unit A is installed while being mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5) of the cabinet G, so that the display unit A can be moved backward in the cabinet G. It is possible to perform positioning. The display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet G by being screwed to the front surface of the cabinet G through the through hole C141 of the front portion C14. It has become.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: right side plate C2, left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking the hands on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged beside the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal directions are aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is incorporated in the cabinet G, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. .. Specifically, a worker located on the front side of the cabinet G releases the screw fastening of the display unit A to the cabinet G and removes the screw. Then, the user reaches into the cabinet G and holds the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands, and the display unit A is taken out of the cabinet G. After that, by reaching into the screen device C through one of the operation openings C21 of the removed display unit A and rotating the crank gear E21 that is seen in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C21, the front screen in the locked state The mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, a hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet G into the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C to open the operation opening C21. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, the lock state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A from the cabinet G.

Further, a motor housing portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor housing portion C22 positions and positions the drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 (see FIG. 20). The right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 each have a first support portion C23 that rotatably supports a gear shaft E21a of a crank gear E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2, and an intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The second support portion C24 that rotatably supports the shaft member E3 that serves as the gear shaft is formed. As described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B of the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are arranged between the right movable body base C5 and the right side plate C2 in the left-right direction. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A is arranged between the left movable body base C6 and the left side plate C3 in the left-right direction.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 15, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a concave portion CO for positioning and arranging the relay board CK is formed in the lower portion of the back surface thereof. The relay board CK includes various functional parts in the display unit A (for example, the projector device B2, the front screen drive mechanism E2, the reel screen drive mechanism F2, etc.) and various functional parts other than the display unit A (sub-control board SS described later, etc.). ) Is a relay board for relaying the wiring (not shown) with the wiring board. The relay board CK includes a screen drive control board CS (see FIGS. 37 and 42) for exchanging signals and the like with the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2.

An operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is incorporated in the cabinet G, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet G. After that, by extending the hand from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C and rotating the intermediate gear E23 which is seen in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the front screen mechanism E1 in the locked state can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

The back plate C4 is arranged in front of the rear ends of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. As a result, when the display unit A is placed on the intermediate support plate G1 of the cabinet G, the space GS is formed by the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 of the screen device C. Will be defined. That is, a gap is secured between the back wall G3 and the back plate C4. Thereby, even if the relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, it is possible to prevent the relay board CK from interfering with the back wall G3 of the cabinet G due to the space GS.

Further, a through hole G11 is formed in the intermediate support plate G1 at a position facing the space GS (see FIG. 5). The through hole G11 is formed so that its opening surrounds the relay substrate CK in a top view. Then, the relay board CK is arranged so that the connector CK1 to which the wiring from the device (such as a sub-control board SS to be described later) housed in the lower space of the cabinet G is connected to the through hole G11. .. Thereby, the relay board CK of the display unit A and the equipment accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G are electrically connected by inserting the wiring from the equipment accommodated in the lower space into the through hole G11. This can be done by connecting to CK1.

By thus arranging the relay substrate CK on the outside of the screen device C, the wiring work is facilitated, and it is not necessary to secure an installation space for the relay substrate CK in the screen device C, The degree of freedom in designing the screen device C is expanded. Further, the heat generated from the relay board CK can be easily discharged to the outside of the machine through the ventilation hole G3a (see FIG. 2) formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G.

Further, the wiring connecting the relay board CK arranged in the upper space of the cabinet G and the equipment housed in the lower space of the cabinet G passes through the through hole G11 formed in the rear portion of the intermediate support plate G1. Therefore, it becomes easy to arrange the wiring behind the various devices in the cabinet G. As a result, the degree of freedom in wiring arrangement can be increased.

Since the relay board CK is arranged in the rear portion of the cabinet G, it is difficult for light to reach the relay board CK, and as a result, it is difficult to connect the wiring to the connector CK1 of the relay board CK. In some cases, Therefore, in order to facilitate the connection of the wiring from the device housed in the lower space of the cabinet G to the relay board CK, the connector CK1 of the relay board CK passes through the through hole G11 and is located below the intermediate support plate G1. It may be configured so as to project into the. The color of the connector CK1 may be a color having a high light reflectance (for example, white).

As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2, and the gear shaft E21a and the shaft member E3 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The relay board CK is positioned and arranged with respect to the back plate C4. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the screen drive mechanisms F2, E2, and the relay board CK are positioned and arranged on one of the bottom plate C1, the side plates C2, C3, and the back plate C4, respectively, and The plates are positioned and arranged on different plates. Therefore, even if the display unit A as a whole cannot be shared between the models of the gaming machine 1, it can be shared among the models on a board-by-plate basis. As a result, it becomes possible to manufacture the display unit at a lower cost than when manufacturing the display unit for each model.

Further, since the plates C1 to C4 of the screen housing C10 are connected by screw fastening, the plates C1 to C4 can be disconnected from each other by loosening the screws. That is, the screen housing C10 is assembled so that the plates C1 to C4 can be replaced. As a result, the functional parts of the display unit can be replaced on a plate-by-plate basis, and the specifications of the display unit A can be changed while reusing the functional parts that are not the replacement target of the display unit A. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 20, the right movable body base C5 is arranged on the left inside of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Further, the left movable body base C6 is arranged on the inner right side of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A. As a result, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, which are decorative members, make it difficult for the player to see the drive mechanisms E2 and F2. As a result, the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the bottom plate C1 is formed with a recess for arranging the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, these can be easily positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 17, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between a front exposed position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position exists in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 hides the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 becomes the projection target of the projector device B2. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes the projection target of the projector device B2.

As shown in FIG. 18, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes the projection target of the projector device B2. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes the projection target of the projector device B2.

(Display unit A: screen device C: fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed to the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection part D1, a right surface reflection part D2, a left surface reflection part D3, and a bottom surface reflection part D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are projection surfaces onto which the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is projected, and are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B.

The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflective portions as long as the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of reflective surfaces at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, a reflecting portion having a curved or arcuate reflecting surface whose curvature center point is located on the front surface side and which has continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis may be provided.

The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface arranged to face the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation unit B arranged in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D to the front. Is set. The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are joined to the right side portion and the left side portion of the front reflection portion D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front reflection portion D1. The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are arranged such that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width of the front reflection portion D1 in the left-right direction. As a result, in the right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3, the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface is easily directed toward the front reflecting portion D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. In addition, with respect to the lower surface reflecting portion D4 as well, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface is easily directed to the front reflecting portion D1 direction, a part of the irradiation light is directed to the front reflecting portion D1 direction while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

In the fixed screen mechanism D, the lightness of the reflection surface is set lower than the lightness of the reflection surface of each of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the irradiation surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected by the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents white blur due to light mixing due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In addition, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, it is possible to reduce the reflection of the irradiation light on the front reflection portion D1 in the other reflection portions D2, D3, and D4, so that it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflection portion D1.

As the lightness, the brightness in the L*a*b* color system (L*a*b* color space) or the L*u*v* color system (L*u*v* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as it can express other colors with relative values with respect to white.

The lightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the lightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value that is lower by about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) than the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than that of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is set to the front screen. The color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be blacker than the color of the paint. For example, a white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the same as that of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. What added the black pigment to the coating material applied to a base material may be used.

In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only white pigments among white pigments and black pigments, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white pigments and black pigments may be included. In addition, the ratio of black pigment to white pigment in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is higher than that in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or It may be about 10 to 20%). As the coating material to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known coating materials for screens can be appropriately adopted and can be adjusted according to the type of the screen (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

It should be noted that, instead of including the black pigment in the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, the black pigment is dispersed in the resin as the material of the base material. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the lightness of the base material itself may be lowered.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, members constituting the screen casing C10 such as the peripheral walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4) and the inside of the screen casing C10. It is desirable to reduce the brightness of the other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, for the peripheral wall, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen. The lower the better. That is, it is preferable that the color of the surrounding wall be closer to black.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 19, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have The front screen member E11 is formed by applying screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has a flat projection surface E11a.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape that is similar to the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set to have two depths, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly on both ends in the lateral direction passing through the center portion.

As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the step E121a at the peripheral edge and the linear step E121b passing through the center, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support base E12 in the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing the projection surface E11a to be distorted.

The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. On the first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b, for example, patterns related to the effect of the game are three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are integrated by being formed separately and then bonded with an adhesive. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 is in a state where the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11 even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to sinking of the projection surface E11a.

The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to adhesion with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

The flat panel forming the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material for the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that may cause sink marks when injection molding is appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right front screen drive mechanism E2 connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

As shown in FIG. 17, the front screen mechanism E1 is configured so as to incline upward from the rear end toward the front end when the front screen mechanism E1 is placed in the front standby position (in the standby posture). ing. The inclination of the front screen mechanism E1 is substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 and the inclined surface B2a1 of the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2.

As described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front standby position, the posture of the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined so as to be inclined upward from the rear end portion to the front end portion, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is parallel to the horizontal plane. It is possible to suppress the irradiation light emitted by the irradiation unit B from being blocked by the front screen mechanism E1 as compared with the case where the posture is set. As a result, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when it is located at the front standby position can be brought closer to the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be upsized even in the limited space of the display unit A. In addition, as described above, since the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has the inclined surface B2a1, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when the projector device B2 is placed at the front standby position is set to the projector device B2. Can be brought closer together. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be further enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 14, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is positioned such that the upper end portion (one end portion) of the crank member E22 is an upper portion when the front end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position (in the exposure position). Are linked to.

The crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 (see FIG. 13) at the intermediate position. As a result, the crank member E22 is capable of rotating the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) about the intermediate position as the rotation center. It should be noted that this intermediate position coincides with the central axis of rotation of the front screen mechanism E1.

As described above, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 arranged at the front exposure position. Further, the crank member E22 is connected at its upper end portion (one end portion) to a position which is an upper portion on the rear surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 when the crank member E22 is disposed at the front exposure position (in the exposure posture). .. With the above configuration, the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposure position can be reduced, and thus the front screen mechanism E1 can be increased in size.

A slide groove (not shown) is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove is formed to have a U-shape when viewed from the side. A slide member E26 (see FIG. 14) is movably engaged with the slide groove. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the slide groove. The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position of the crank gear E21. As shown in FIG. 13, a gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the first support portion C23 of the right side plate C2. The gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 has a line segment that connects the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position, and is located at an intermediate position of the crank member E22 and a center point of the slide member E26. It is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the and.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the gear shaft E21a moves in the direction in which all components of this force are applied. Exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure having three degrees of freedom links with the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as free ends is formed, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is formed. The front screen mechanism E1 does not move even when is pushed by hand because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. The intermediate gear E23 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the second supporting portion C24 of the right side plate C2. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning trajectory of the slide member E26. Further, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position, the line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position of the slide member E26 connects the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the center point of the slide member E26. The tangential direction of the turning trajectory is parallel to the slide groove of the crank member E22 because it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture and the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the crank gear E21 easily starts to rotate.

When the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, since the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position is movable along the slide groove, the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft of the crank gear E21. A two-degree-of-freedom link having one degree of freedom is formed with E21a as a fixed end and the slide member E26 as a free end that is movable along the slide groove. When the slide member E26 rotates, the slide member E26 slides along the slide groove, whereby the crank member E22 rotates about the intermediate position as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 rotates. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor E25 is a stepping motor and is electrically connected to the sub control board SS via the relay board CK and the sub relay board SN (see FIG. 34). Drive controlled. The drive motor E25 may be connected to the main control board MS via the relay board CK and drive-controlled by the main control board MS.

Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 gradually accelerates from 0 in the stopped state in the standby posture or the exposed posture, reaches the maximum velocity in the intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture, and then gradually decreases, When the exposure posture or the standby posture is reached, the stopped state becomes 0 again. As a result, the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration is small (inertia moment), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce breakdown and wear of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25) due to overload.

The right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 (see FIG. 13).

In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the shaft member E3 integrally rotate. Then, as the crank gears E21, E21 are rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23, E23, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated around the rotation center axis, and the front standby position and the front It will move to and from the exposed position.

As described above, by connecting the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B by the shaft member E3, the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is applied to the two crank members E22. It is possible to transmit evenly. Therefore, as compared with the case where the intermediate gears E23 and E23 are not connected by the shaft member E3, it is possible to prevent the driving load from being concentrated on one of the two crank members E22. Further, since the drive motor E25 is provided in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B arranged to the right of the fixed screen mechanism D, it does not hinder the arrangement of the fixed screen mechanism D.

In addition, the shaft member E3 is not used as the rotating shaft of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, the degree of freedom in disposing the shaft member E3 is increased, and the shaft member E3 can be arranged so as not to obstruct the disposition of another accessory such as the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging another accessory while maintaining the rotation range and size of the front screen mechanism E1 at a desired degree.

Further, since the shaft member E3 is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D, the light projected on the fixed screen mechanism D is not blocked by the shaft member E3. Further, since the center axis of rotation of the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D, compared with the case where it is arranged behind the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D. Thus, the length between the front screen mechanism E1 and the center axis of rotation (the length of the crank member E22) can be shortened. Therefore, even when the display unit A cannot be upsized due to the limited space in the cabinet G, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be maintained at a desired level.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIG. 18, the reel screen mechanism F1 is composed of a curved flat plate. The reel screen mechanism F1 has an arcuate shape in side view, which is curved in a shape similar to the rotation direction. On the surface of the reel screen mechanism F1, a pattern is formed on the peripheral portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral portion is the projection surface F1a. The projection surface F1a is an arc surface that is convex on the upstream side in the irradiation direction of light from the projector device B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position. Further, a pattern is formed on the rear surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 that is on the side of the center of rotation. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position.

The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between the reel standby position and the reel exposed position by the driving force of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Then, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the projection surface F1a can display an image by irradiation of irradiation light.

(Display unit A: screen device C: reel screen drive mechanism F2)
As shown in FIG. 20, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 includes two arm members F21 (not shown on the right side), an arcuate gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One ends of the two arm members F21 are connected to the right end rear surface and the left end rear surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. A support shaft F21a (not shown on the left side) is formed on the outer surface of the other end of each of the two arm members F21 so as to project outward in the left-right direction. The support shafts F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6. This allows the two arm members F21 to rotate about the support shaft F21a. The support shafts F21a coincide with the rotation center shaft of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The arcuate gear F22 is fixed to the tip of the support shaft F21a arranged on the right side. A motor shaft gear F23 is meshed with the arcuate gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23. In the present embodiment, the drive motor F24 is a stepping motor and is electrically connected to the sub control board SS via the relay board CK and the sub relay board SN (see FIG. 34). Drive controlled. The drive motor F24 may be connected to the main control board MS via the relay board CK and driven and controlled by the main control board MS.

In the above configuration, when the drive motor F24 is driven under the control of the sub control board SS, the motor shaft gear F23 rotates. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear F23, the arcuate gear F22 rotates. Then, as the arm member F21 is rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the arcuate gear F22, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated around the rotation center axis, and the reel standby position and the reel exposure position are reached. Will work between.

(Display unit A: screen device C: sensor mechanism)
As described above, the operating ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 partially overlap each other (see FIGS. 17 and 18). The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven by different drive mechanisms E2 and F2. That is, the drive of the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive of the reel screen mechanism F1 are not linked (synchronized). Therefore, in order to prevent interference (contact) between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, it is necessary to know the positions of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub control board SS (see FIG. 34) determines the position of the front screen mechanism E1 based on the front standby position as the origin position and the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from this origin position. ing. Similarly, with the reel standby position as the origin position, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 is grasped based on the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from this origin position.

However, when the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not normally performed, or when the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is manually moved during the power-off, the sub control board SS Cannot grasp the accurate positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are operated in such a situation, they may interfere with each other.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the screen device C includes a sensor mechanism (not shown) for detecting the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Then, the sub control board SS executes a return operation for returning the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the origin position (standby position) based on the detection result from the sensor mechanism.

For example, as described above, since the front standby position and the reel standby position are arranged in the overlapping range in the operating range of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposure position, The reel screen mechanism F1 is not arranged at the reel exposure position. Therefore, when the sensor mechanism detects that the front screen is at the front exposure position, it indicates that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not present at the reel exposure position.

(Screen surface treatment)
Next, the surface processing of the screen will be described. A projection target screen such as the front reflection part D1, the right reflection part D2, the left reflection part D3, and the bottom reflection part D4 of the fixed screen mechanism D, the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11, and the projection surface F1a of the reel screen mechanism F1. Is textured to achieve appropriate performance. The texturing is a process in which a texture (wrinkle pattern) is formed on the surface. The projection target screen or the like is molded by using a textured mold, and thus a wrinkle pattern is formed on the surface of the projection target screen or the like. By such a wrinkle pattern on the surface, it is possible to effectively prevent the reflection of the light source, and further it is possible to realize a good projection image.

The textured pattern includes a pattern called "matte", and in the present embodiment, for example, a matte pattern having an average depth of about 25 μm to 30 μm and a draft of 3% or more (matte No. 5). Is preferred.

In addition, as a surface treatment of a screen or the like, two-layer coating is applied in order to realize appropriate performance. Two-layer coating means that coatings with different properties are coated on top and bottom (in two layers) respectively. For example, a high-brightness paint having high reflectivity (for example, 2P-600 silver which is “super-brightness silver” of a metallic tone paint) is used as the undercoat, and a matte paint (for example, “matte paint” is used as the topcoat. HG-650 white) which is "white" can be used. It is also possible to add about 5% of a matting agent (silica) to HG-650 white.

In such coating, the topcoat has a film thickness of, for example, 22 to 23 μm, and the undercoat has a film thickness of, for example, about 1 μm. By such coating, the glossiness at a gloss of 60 becomes 4 to 5.

Note that 2P-600 Silver uses vapor-deposited aluminum as the aluminum pigment, and the weight concentration (PWC) of the aluminum pigment in the coating film is set to 20 to 30%, which is set higher than that of general silver paint, resulting in higher gloss. The value (reflection performance) is shown. In addition, the composition of HG-650 white is that resin is 20 to 30%, titanium oxide is 30 to 40%, silica as a matting agent is 5 to 10%, additive is 0.5 to 2%, and solvent is 30-40%.

In addition to this, as the top coat paint, a paint containing HG-650 white to which glass-based or resin-based beads having various average particle diameters as a matting agent are added in a predetermined ratio, or a coating containing silica added to the beads. It can also be used. Further, it is also possible to use HG-650F clear or a paint in which beads having various average particle diameters are added as a matting agent in a predetermined ratio to HG-650F clear. The film thickness can be adjusted variously, for example, from 16 to 23 μm. The composition of HG-650F clear resin is 20 to 30%, silica as a matting agent is 2 to 5%, additive is 0.5 to 2%, and solvent is 60 to 70%.

As another undercoat paint, HG-650 white or a paint in which glass-based or resin-based beads having various average particle diameters as a matting agent are added to a predetermined ratio to HG-650 white can be used. Further, the film thickness can be variously adjusted, for example, from 1 to 21 μm.

As described above, it is possible to effectively prevent the reflection of the light source by forming the screen or the like to be projected by the embossing process or applying the two-layer coating, and to further improve the projection image projection. Can be realized. Further, the above-mentioned two-layer coating can be applied to the textured screen or accessory. The material of the screen or the like to be projected is, for example, black or white ABS resin or transparent polycarbonate resin, but is not limited to these.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: electrical and optical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 21, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. A sub-control board SS, which will be described later, is connected to the projector device B2 via a relay board CK. Although not shown in FIG. 21, the relay substrate CK and the sub control substrate SS are connected via a scaler substrate SK (see FIGS. 37 and 43) described later. The sub-control board SS controls the projector control board B23 according to the effect operation of the screen or the accessory, and projects the irradiation light on the screen or the accessory via the optical mechanism B24, thereby providing a visual effect. Display the video. In the assembly process of the display unit A and the like, the adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the projector control board B23 (see FIGS. 30 and 37) of the projector device B2. The adjustment PC 1000 is used to adjust the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and perform focus initial setting (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is adopted as the adjustment device of the projector device B2. However, as the adjustment device of the projector device B2, a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone in which an adjustment program (application software) is installed is used. Alternatively, it may be a dedicated terminal device.

The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231, a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. As shown in FIG. 33, the optical mechanism B24 includes LED light sources 240R, 240G, which emit R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color lights as constituent elements arranged around the lens unit B21. 240B, DMD 241, and a focus mechanism 242 for performing focus adjustment for the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21.

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 so as to project the irradiation light based on the command from the sub control substrate SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism 242 to move the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on a command from the sub-control board SS, thereby performing focus adjustment when the irradiation light is projected. The EEPROM 231 stores data relating to the setting/adjustment of the projector device B2 by the control LSI 230. Although not shown in particular, the control LSI 230 has a built-in ROM in which a control program and the like are stored and a DRAM used in a work area related to setting/adjustment of the projector B2.

The DLP system of the projector device B2 is mainly configured by the DLP control circuit 232, the LED driver 233, and the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and the DMD 241 of the optical mechanism B24.

The DMD 241 is one in which mirrors corresponding to pixels corresponding to display resolution are integrated on the main surface of a semiconductor chip. The DMD 241 is configured such that each mirror is tilted +10° or −10° around an axis along a diagonal line with respect to the main surface due to an electrostatic field effect of a memory element immediately below each mirror. With such a configuration, each mirror of the DMD 241 is switched between an ON state (a state that reflects light in a predetermined direction) and an OFF state (a state that reflects light outside the predetermined direction). That is, when each mirror of the DMD 241 is in the ON state, it guides the light incident from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B through the dichroic mirror (not shown) or the like to the lens unit B21 through the dichroic mirror or the like, and turns it off. In the state, the light incident from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B via the dichroic mirror or the like is reflected toward a direction other than the lens unit B21.

The DLP control circuit 232 controls the LED driver 233 that drives the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B, and outputs the light of each RGB color from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B in a time-division manner to the DMD 241 via a dichroic mirror (not shown). Incident on. At this time, the DLP control circuit 232 turns the mirror corresponding to which pixel into the ON state or the OFF state at which timing according to the projected image, that is, at which timing of which color light of each color of RGB is at which timing. Determines whether or not to reflect in a predetermined direction, and controls the ON/OFF state of each mirror of the DMD 241.

By such control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected by the DMD 241 in the predetermined direction proceeds to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, and enters the mirror mechanism B3, and finally the mirror mechanism B3. It is guided to the projection target by being reflected. As a result, the irradiation light is projected onto the screen or accessory that is the projection target, and an image according to the effect is formed.

In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. In addition, the projector device B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by folding back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and makes the projection distance of the irradiation light as short as possible by setting the contrast ratio to 1000:1, for example. ing. As a result, the display unit A including the projector device B2 is configured to be cheaper and smaller, and is easily mounted in the limited space in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: mechanical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the projector device B2 has a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an under cover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as constituent elements that serve as an exterior. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. An under cover B223 is arranged on the lower surface of the case B22 so as to cover it. The under cover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via the stay B223a, and is also fixed to an appropriate lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall B12, and the lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end of the case B22 so as to cover the upper surface opening of the case B22. The lower pedestal B221 is connected. A procedure for mounting and adjusting such a projector device B2 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 23, 24, and 33, the projector device B2 includes a lens unit B21, LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, and a DMD 241 on which the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B are mounted as internal components. The DMD board 241a, the plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, the intake fans 244A (FAN1), 244B (FAN2), the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), and the projector control board B23. The lens unit B21 is accommodated in the case B22 while the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 is covered with the lens unit cover B222, and the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, the DMD board 241a, and the plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B. , 243D, intake fans 244A, 244B, and exhaust fan 245 are housed. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22. Although not particularly shown in FIG. 33 and the like, the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD board 241a are equipped with a temperature sensor B25 (see FIGS. 21 and 37) including, for example, a thermistor. These temperature sensors B25 detect temperatures near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and near the lens unit B21, and output a temperature detection signal to the projector control board B23.

The lens unit B21 includes an optical case B21a that houses a dichroic mirror, a reflection plate, and the like (not shown), a lens group 210A that includes the projection lens 210, a lens holder B21b that is provided in the front part of the optical case B21a while holding the lens group 210A, and A focus mechanism 242 is provided on the right side of the front part of the optical case B21a so that a part of the lens holder B21b can be moved in the optical axis direction (front-back direction). The optical case B21a is provided with openings for exposing the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and the DMD 241 from the outside to the inside. The rear part of the lens holder B21b is fixed to the front part of the optical case B21a, while the front part is relatively moved in the front-rear direction (optical axis direction) by the focus mechanism 242 with respect to the rear part. The projection lens 210 is held in the. A so-called lens shift mechanism (not shown) is provided in the lens unit B21, and a horizontal or vertical position (horizontal image position or vertical direction) of an image projected by using this lens shift mechanism is used. Image position) can be finely adjusted.

The focus mechanism 242 is for focusing on the reflection surfaces of the reflection portions D1 to D4 and the projection surfaces E11a and F1a displaced with respect to the projector device B2 while changing the focal length of the projection lens 210. The focus mechanism 242 is arranged along the optical axis direction of the projection lens 210 and a rack member 242A that is movable integrally with the front side portion of the lens holder B21b that holds the projection lens 210, and is screwed to the rack member 242A. It has a lead screw 242B that is rotatable while rotating, and a focus motor 242C that rotates the lead screw 242B. The focus motor 242C is connected to the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23.

For example, when the focus motor 242C rotates the lead screw 242B in a predetermined direction, the rack member 242A moves to the front side by the feed screw operation, and the projection lens 210 also moves to the front side together with the rack member 242A. Since the focal length is relatively long, the focal point (focus position) is adjusted to a distant place. On the other hand, when the focus motor 242C rotates the lead screw 242B in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the rack member 242A is moved to the rear side by the operation of the feed screw, and the projection lens 210 is integrated with the rack member 242A to the front side. As a result of moving to, the focal length becomes relatively short, and the focus (focus position) is adjusted to the closer one.

With such a focus mechanism 242, the focal length can be dynamically changed in association with the movement of the projection planes E11a and F1a. Further, for example, when the projection target is changed from the projection surface E11a to the projection surface F1a or vice versa, since the optical path lengths from the projection lens 210 to the respective projection targets are different to some extent, It is possible to statically change the focus (focus position) so that the focal length becomes appropriate according to the length.

The front part of the lens holder B21b and the projection lens 210 are covered with a lens unit cover B222. The lens unit cover B222 is provided with a translucent surface B222a that transmits the irradiation light from the projection lens 210, and the light emitted from the projection lens 210 passes through the translucent surface B222a and proceeds to the mirror mechanism B3. ..

The LED substrate 240Ra is disposed inside the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear right side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240R is exposed inside the optical case B21a. The LED board 240Ga is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear rear side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240G is exposed inside the optical case B21a. The LED substrate 240Ba is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear left side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240B is exposed inside the optical case B21a. The DMD substrate 241a is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the left side surface of the optical case B21a, and the DMD 241 is exposed inside the optical case B21a. Here, in the present embodiment, as the heat generation characteristics of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and the DMD 241, the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B tend to be relatively high, while the LED light source 240R and the DMD 241 are relatively high. It tends to be low.

As shown in FIG. 24A, a focus mechanism 242 is arranged on the right side of the lens holder B21b, and a projection lens 210 is arranged on the front part of the lens holder B21b. The front part of the lens holder B21b can be moved in the optical axis direction of the projection lens 210 by the focus mechanism 242. Although not described in detail, the focus mechanism 242 includes a stepping motor, a lead screw, a carriage, and the like, and is configured to be movable in the optical axis direction at the front portion of the lens holder B21b.

That is, the projection lens 210 is movable with the focus mechanism 242 integrally with the front portion of the lens holder B21b, and as shown in FIG. 24A, the projection lens 210 is moved from the rear side to the front side along the optical axis direction. Or, it moves from the front side to the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the light from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B reaches the DMD 241 via a collimator, a dichroic mirror, etc., which are not shown, and after being reflected by the DMD 241, the lens group 210A is reflected by the dichroic mirror, etc. And is finally emitted through the projection lens 210.

The projection lens 210 is configured to move in the optical axis direction as described above. As a result, focus adjustment is performed, and a clear and focused image is displayed on the screen or accessory whose position has been changed by movement.

The projector device B2 is controlled by the sub-control board SS so that the sub-control board SS transmits video data relating to a video image such as an effect and projects the video image on a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub-control board SS moves the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the effect contents by controlling the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2.

Here, the sub-control board SS controls the projector device B2 according to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the effect, and the projection surfaces E11a and F1a of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surfaces of the fixed screen mechanism D are controlled. , Adjust the focus so that the image is projected clearly.

The heat sink 243R is arranged on the right side in the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ra. The heat sink 243G is arranged on the rear side of the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ga. The heat sink 243B is arranged in the center of the case B22 and is in partial contact with the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ba. The heat sink 243D is arranged on the left side in the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the DMD substrate 241a. Here, in the present embodiment, regarding the fin outer size of the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, the heat sinks 243R and 243G are relatively large, while the heat sinks 243B and 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D dissipate the heat generated in each of the LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD substrate 241a into the air, thereby changing the temperature of the optical element or the substrate until the optical characteristics are largely changed. Dissipate heat efficiently so as not to raise. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat radiation members, are made of an aluminum material having high heat conductivity to enhance the heat radiation effect, and have a plurality of heat radiation fins to increase the contact area with air.

The intake fan 244A is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the right front portion of the case B22 and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged close to the back surface of the left side portion of the case B22 and close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged close to the back surface of the rear part of the case B22 and close to the heat sink 243G.

Here, as shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, an intake port B22A is provided in the right front part of the case B22 with which the intake fan 244A is in close proximity, and the heat sink 243R is close to face the intake port B22A. An exhaust port B22E is provided on the right rear portion of the case B22. An intake port B22B is provided in a part of the left side portion of the case B22 that is close to the intake fan 244B, and the other side portion of the left side portion of the case B22 is aligned with the intake port B22B. The intake port B22C is provided so that the air reaches the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, 243D through the empty space S. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22, which is close to the exhaust fan 245.

That is, as shown in FIG. 33, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, after being forcibly taken in by the intake fan 244A from the intake port B22A, it is exhausted from the exhaust port B22E while removing heat from the heat sink 243R. An air flow path P1 is formed as a flow of air. Further, in the case B22, after being forcibly sucked by the intake fan 244B from the intake port B22B, the heat is removed from the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G while being forced by the exhaust fan 45 from the exhaust port B22D. An air flow path P2 is formed as a flow of air exhausted to the. Further, in the case B22, an air flow path is used as a flow of air that is forcibly exhausted by the exhaust fan 45 from the exhaust port B22D while absorbing heat from the heat sink 243G and the heat sink 243B after being sucked from the intake port B22C. P3 is formed.

The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered with the under cover B223. A control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231, a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233 and the like are mounted on the projector control board B23. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD board 241a arranged in the case B22, and the focus mechanism 242.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: position/orientation adjustment of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (see FIGS. 6 and 8) of the projector cover B1, and includes the rectangular main body portion 2200 and the main body portion 2200. Left and right ends 2201a and 2201b, which are formed by bending the left and right sides downward and outward and extend to the left and right with a step with the main body 2200, and a partial portion from the rear side to the rear of the main body 2200. Has a rear end portion 2202 extending therethrough. The main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 are provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. These three connection holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the main body 2200. Each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 by screw fastening. In this embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged at each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b, and are provided at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameters of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 28) inserted and fastened therein.

The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member that substantially corresponds to the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. On the lower pedestal B221, three connecting screw portions 2210 are integrally formed so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line within a plane (horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221. The lower pedestal B221 inserts the coil spring 2211 into each of the connecting screw portions 2210, inserts the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 into the connecting hole 2200A, and sandwiches the coil spring 2211 between the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202. While in this state, a nut 2213 is fastened from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B220 to the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 via a washer 2212, whereby the upper pedestal B220 is connected while being suspended from the lower surface thereof. Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the under cover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

That is, as shown in FIG. 23 and FIGS. 25 to 27, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other at three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 such that their intervals can be adjusted. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 includes a connecting hole 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, a connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213.

By using the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 as described above, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 in a positionally adjustable and optical axis adjustable manner.

FIG. 28 shows how the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower diagram of FIG. 28(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the mounting screw T is inserted and fastened into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, and the upper diagram of FIG. 28(a) is the upper diagram of FIG. It is sectional drawing which follows the BB' line shown in the following figure. 28 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, the periphery of the remaining square hole 2201c in the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b is the same.

As shown in FIG. 28A, the mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is arranged substantially at the center of the square hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to a nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall portion B12 via a washer W arranged along the upper surface of the upper wall portion B12 and the lower surface of the left end portion 2201a. As a result, the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 by screws. The right end 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 is also attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 by the same screwing.

Here, in FIG. 28A, a hatched portion indicated by reference symbol A is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 28A, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed at substantially the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the hatched portion of the symbol A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1.

28B shows a state in which the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is displaced in the direction of arrow E with respect to FIG. The upper diagram of FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D′ shown in the lower diagram of FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 28( b ), the screw axis of the mounting screw T is relatively displaced to the left within the opening range of the square hole 2201 c, and is within the range (adjustment range) of the hatched portion indicated by the symbol C. It is possible to move with.

In this way, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, in the projector device B2, the attachment position with respect to the upper wall portion B12 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-back direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220. Thereby, the direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is easily adjusted as the reference direction so as to be perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincide with the front-back direction.

FIG. 29 shows a connecting structure of the lower pedestal B221 to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the lower pedestal B221 is coupled to the upper pedestal B220 by the coupling hole 2200A, the coupling screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 in the coupling portion R2. Although FIG. 29 shows the connecting portion R2 at one place, the remaining connecting portions R1 and R3 are also the same.

The connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body portion 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and screwed to the nut 2213 via the washer 2212 arranged on the upper surface side of the main body portion 2200. It A coil spring 2211 is fitted on the connecting screw portion 2210, and the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body portion 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the peripheral edge portion of the connecting hole 2200A. By such a coil spring 2211, the portion near the connecting portion R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is urged in the direction (vertical direction) away from each other, so that the connecting screw portion 2210 and the nut 2213 are screwed together. Preventing looseness at the mating part.

In such a connecting portion R2, the gap between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is changed while being urged by the coil spring 2211 by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the tightening direction or the loosening direction. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the interval between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connection R2 is narrowed. At this time, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (not shown in FIG. 29). Therefore, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in a direction closer to the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a higher position. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connection R2 is increased. That is, the portion near the connecting portion R2 of the lower pedestal B221 is displaced in a direction away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a lower position.

Also in the other connecting portions R1 and R3, the height position near the connecting portions R1 and R3 of the lower pedestal B221 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. Such connecting portions R1, R2, R3 are specifically formed by connecting lines to form a triangle so as not to be on the same straight line in a plane (in a horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. Are arranged as follows. That is, since the lower pedestal B221 can finely adjust the height position by the tightening amount of the nut 2213 at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be changed in the front-back direction. It is possible to adjust the degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space with respect to either the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.

The attitude adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating the screen or the like from the projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At that time, an image is projected on the screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. Thereby, the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that the image is displayed on the surface of the screen or the like in an appropriate display mode. That is, the optical axis direction can be adjusted in advance by adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal B221 so that so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur in the image display mode.

As shown in FIG. 30, adjustment in the optical axis direction and the like are performed using the adjustment PC 1000 connected to the projector device B2 via the sub-control board SS or the like. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is not only adjusted in the optical axis direction, but also checked for a display image on a screen during inspection at the factory. , Various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying an image are performed. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the projector control board B23 of the projector device B2 during the adjustment work (see FIG. 37). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000 changes optical parameters related to the projection position of the irradiation light in the projector device B2, focus adjustment, and the like. The projection position and the optical parameter appropriately adjusted in this way are adjusted value data (horizontal position (horizontal image position) A to E adjustment values, vertical position (vertical direction) The image positions A to E adjustment values and the focus positions A to E adjustment values) are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 (see FIG. 106). In the case where the adjustment value data of the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, and the focus position stored in the EEPROM 231 is not supplied to the projector device B2 for transportation after factory shipment, and the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall. But you can use it as is. Such horizontal position adjustment and vertical adjustment data are acquired to control the lens shift mechanism of the lens unit B21, and focus position adjustment value data are acquired to control the focus mechanism 242. .. The horizontal position A to E adjustment values, the vertical position A to E adjustment values, the focus position A to E adjustment values, and the horizontal position (horizontal image position) A to E offset, and the vertical position ( Vertical image position) A to E offset, focus positions A to E offset, and focus drift correction values A to E of "AE", for example, "A" is the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D, and "B" is The projection planes E11a and “C” of the front screen member E11 correspond to the adjustment value data corresponding to the projection plane F1a of the reel screen mechanism F1, and “D” and “E” indicate future expandability (projection plane is It is a backup considering the case (when it increases).

As is clear from what has been described above with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, the projector device B2 is positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction mainly in accordance with the mounting position with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the upper pedestal B220, and at the same time, The optical axis direction is adjusted according to the posture of the side pedestal B221 in the three-dimensional space.

In the present embodiment, the connecting portions for connecting the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 to each other are provided at three locations, but if at least three locations are not on the same straight line, four locations are provided. You may make it provide a connection part above. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with the connection hole 2200A and the lower pedestal B221 is provided with the connection screw portion 2210. However, these connection holes and the connection screw portion may be provided upside down. The connecting screw portion is not limited to the one formed integrally with the pedestal as in the present embodiment, but may be any one that can be fixed to one pedestal. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that is fixed by penetrating the lower pedestal.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: intake/exhaust structure of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the case B22 of the projector device B2 is provided with three intake ports B22A, B22B, B22C and two exhaust ports B22D, B22E. Of the three intake ports B22A, B22B, B22C, two intake ports B22A, B22B are provided with intake fans 244A, 244B, while one intake port B22C is not provided with an intake fan. Further, one of the two exhaust ports B22D and B22E is provided with an exhaust fan 245, while the other exhaust port B22E is not provided with an exhaust fan.

At the intake port B22A, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 by the intake fan 244A, and the flow of this air passes through the heat sink 243R as the air flow path P1 to remove heat from the heat sink 243R. After that, the air flow path P1 linearly flows from the heat sink 243R to the exhaust port B22E, and is naturally discharged (exhausted heat) from the exhaust port B22E to the outside of the case B22.

Also at the intake port B22B, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 by the intake fan 244B. This air flow removes heat from the plurality of heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G by passing through the plurality of heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G while passing through a part of the empty space S as the air flow path P2. After that, the air flow path P2 is drawn into the exhaust fan 245 to flow so as to bend toward the exhaust port B22D, and is forcibly discharged (exhausted heat) from the exhaust port B22D to the outside of the case B22.

At the intake port B22C, air is semi-forcedly taken into the case B22 mainly by the pulling force of the exhaust fan 245. This air flow mainly passes through the heat sinks 243B and 243G while passing through a considerable portion of the empty space S as the air flow path P3, thereby removing heat from the plurality of heat sinks 243B and 243G. Then, the air flow path P3 also flows toward the exhaust port B22D by being drawn into the exhaust fan 245, and merges with the air flow path P2, and is forcibly discharged from the exhaust port B22D to the outside of the case B22. (Exhaust heat). The intake fans 244A and 244B and the exhaust fan 245 function as a cooling device for the projector device B2.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED light sources 240G and 240B have relatively high heat generation characteristics, while the LED light sources 240R and DMD 241 have relatively low heat generation characteristics. The LED substrates 240Ga and 240Ba on which the LED light sources 240G and 240B having high heat generation characteristics are mounted are in thermal contact with the heat sinks 243G and 243B through which the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 pass.

Here, the plurality of air flow paths P2, P3 are merged at one exhaust port B22D while flowing from separate intake ports B22B, B22C, and flow out from the exhaust port B22D using the exhaust port B22D as a common ventilation port. It has become. As a result, the plurality of air flow paths P2, P3 are merged and forcibly discharged to form a smooth flow, and the plurality of heat sinks 243G, 243B can also efficiently remove heat and cool. ..

Further, since the plurality of air flow paths P2, P3 are efficiently and forcibly discharged by the exhaust fan 245, heat accumulation by a plurality of optical elements such as the LED light sources 240G, 240B and the DMD 241 in the projector device B2 is effective. Therefore, overheating of optical components such as lenses can be prevented.

Furthermore, since three more heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G are cooled by the two air flow paths P2, P3 communicating with the one exhaust port B22D, they are provided corresponding to these heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G. The plurality of optical elements such as the DMD 241 and the LED light sources 240B and 240G can be cooled more efficiently.

In the present embodiment, the two air passages P2 and P3 are joined at one exhaust port 245. However, for example, the air passage P1 is also joined at the exhaust port 245 so that three or more air passages P3 are formed. The air passages may be collectively discharged from one exhaust port.

(Cabinet G)
As shown in FIG. 34, a display unit A is provided in the upper space of the cabinet G. Further, the power supply device DE and the hopper mechanism HP are provided at the bottom of the lower space of the cabinet G, and the sub-control board SS is provided on the back side of the power supply device DE and the hopper mechanism HP (the back wall G3 side of the cabinet G). Is provided. That is, the hopper mechanism HP is arranged on the front side of the sub control board SS. A sheet metal BK is installed between the hopper mechanism HP and the sub control substrate SS. Further, a sub relay board SN is provided between the sub control board SS and the intermediate support plate G1. A medal replenishment mechanism MH (corresponding to a replenishment port) for replenishing metal medals from the outside is provided above the hopper mechanism HP, and medals are dropped from the medal replenishment mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP. A scaler substrate SK for connecting the projector device B2, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and the touch panel DD19T to the sub control substrate SS is provided above the medal supply mechanism MH.

In the present embodiment, the sheet metal BK is not in contact with the sub control board SS. The sheet metal BK may be directly attached to the bottom of the sub control board SS. Further, the thin plate-like sub relay board SN detachably attached to the lower surface of the intermediate support plate G1 and the thin plate-like sub control board SS detachably attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are seen from a side view. It is arranged so that the L shape is upside down.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub control board SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the side of the sub control board SS, the sheet metal BK is used. It is possible to prevent the medal from physically contacting the sub control board SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control board SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the sheet metal BK can also prevent the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP. Further, since the sub-control board SS is provided on the inner side of the lower space of the cabinet G and is sandwiched by the back wall G3 and the sheet metal BK, the sub-control board SS is removed from the cabinet G unless the sheet metal BK is removed. I can't. This improves the security of the sub control board SS.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Lower door lock mechanism G51)
As shown in FIG. 35, the lower door locking mechanism G51 includes a locked portion G511 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the lower door mechanism DD, a locking portion G512 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G, and It has a cylinder lock G513.

The locked portion G511 has two rod-shaped locked rods G511a and G511b formed on both ends of a frame G511c having a concave shape in an upper portion and a lower portion.

The locking portion G512 has a long cylinder G5122 and a long locking plate G5121 that is arranged so as to be vertically slidable in the cylinder G5122.

The locking plate G5121 has claw-shaped claw portions G5121a and G5121b that are locked to the locked bars G511a and G511b. The claws G5121a and G5121b slide vertically in the cylinder G5122 as the locking plate G5121 slides, and thus the locked rods inserted into the openings G5122a and G5122b provided in the cylinder G5122. It is locked or unlocked with respect to G511a and G511b. The locking plate G5121 has a spring that is biased upward.

The claws G5121a and G5121b are locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b when the locking plate G5121 is at a height position to lock the lower door mechanism DD, while the locking plate G5121 is locked to the lower door mechanism DD. The lock with respect to the locked rods G511a and G511b is set to be released when the lock rod is lowered from the lock height position to the lock release height position. Further, the claw portions G5121a and G5121b have their tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward, and are pressed down by contact with the locked rods G511a and G511b.

Although not shown, the locking part G512 has a pull-down part in the middle part. The pulling down portion allows the locking plate G5121 to be pulled down as the key is inserted into the cylinder lock G513 and rotated. As a result, as the locking plate G5121 is lowered, the locking plates G5121a and G5121b and the locked rods G511a and G511b can be unlocked. The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a door relay board DS for connecting electronic components and the like on the door side and the cabinet G side.

(Upper door mechanism DU: Upper door lock mechanism G52)
As shown in FIG. 35, the upper door lock mechanism G52 includes a locked portion G521 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the upper door mechanism DU and a locking portion G522 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G. Have

The locked portion G521 has two rod-shaped locked rods G521a and G521b formed on both ends of a frame G521c having a concave shape in the upper and lower portions.

The locking portion G522 has a long tube G5222 and a long locking plate G5221 that is arranged slidably in the tube G5222 in the vertical direction.

The locking plate G5221 has claw-shaped claw parts G5221a and G5221b that are locked to the locked bars G521a and G521b. The claws G5221a and G5221b slide vertically in the tube G5222 as the locking plate G5221 slides, and thus the locked bars inserted into the openings G5222a and G5222b provided in the tube G5222. It is locked or released from the G521a and G521b.

The claws G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked bars G521a and G521b when the locking plate G5221 is at a height position where the locking plate G5221 is locked, while the locking plate G5221 is locked to the upper door mechanism DU. The lock with respect to the locked rods G521a and G521b is set to be released when the lock is lowered from the height position where the lock is locked to the height position where the lock is released. Further, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b have their tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G521a and G521b.

An opening (not shown) is formed below the upper door mechanism DU in the cylinder G5222 of the locking portion G522, and a protrusion (not shown) provided on the locking plate G5221 is inserted through the opening. It projects to the inside of the cabinet G. By pulling this projection downward, the locking plate G5221 is lowered, and the locking between the claw portions G5221a, G5221b and the locked rods G521a, G521b can be released accordingly.

Here, the protrusion is arranged so as to abut on the upper part of the lower door mechanism DD when the locking plate G5221 is in the height position where the locking plate G5221 locks the upper door mechanism DU.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the upper portion of the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the protrusion to prevent the locking plate G5221 from sliding, and the claw portion G5221a. , G5221b and the locked rods G521a and G521b cannot be unlocked, and the upper door mechanism DU can be locked so that it cannot be opened.

On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the physical interference with the upper projection of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the locking plate G5221 can slide in the tube G5222 and the claw portion G5221a. , G5221b is released from the locked rods G521a and G521b, and the upper door mechanism DU can be unlocked from the cabinet G.

Accordingly, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to first perform the unlocking operation of the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door lock mechanism G51. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to perform an unlocking operation for the lower door lock mechanism G51, and after opening the lower door mechanism DD, an unlocking operation for the upper door lock mechanism G52 is required. Security for the upper space of the cabinet G can be enhanced. Further, the upper space of the cabinet G can be made more secure than the lower space of the cabinet G, and the lower space of the cabinet G can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space of the cabinet G. Can be in place.

Further, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. For the administrator of the gaming machine 1, the key has a merit that it is easy to manage because it is compact and suitable for carrying.

Further, the sliding of the locking plate G5221 causes the claw portions G5221a and G5221b to be caught or released by the locked bars G521a and G521b. Accordingly, it is possible to lock the upper space of the cabinet G of the upper door mechanism DU, which is interlocked with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

Further, since the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the end opposite to the pivotally supported end and is arranged on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Therefore, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD widely. As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to unnecessarily expose the lower space of the cabinet G to the outside, and security can be improved.

In this embodiment, a one-way hinge that applies a predetermined torque in the closing direction of the lower door mechanism DD is used between the lower door mechanism DD and the cabinet G. Accordingly, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, torque is applied, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the cabinet G without applying a sudden load. As a result, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the protruding portion B131 that is physically interfered by the lower door mechanism DD.

(Relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS)
As shown in FIG. 36, the lower door mechanism DD of the gaming machine 1 is configured to include a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS.

The lower door DD1 is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the cabinet G (corresponding to a housing). As shown in FIG. 36, the reel unit RU is detachably provided on the rear surface side of the lower door DD1 (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)). In addition to the reels RL, RC, and RR, the reel unit RU is provided with a reel drive board RD that controls a reel motor. The main control board MS is detachably provided on the rear surface side of the reel unit RU (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)).

The main control board MS rotates the reels RL, RC, RR of the reel unit RU based on the command signal output from the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and the like (see FIG. 3). By stopping, the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR are stopped and displayed.

According to the positional relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS as described above, the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, and thus the gaming machine 1 You can easily perform the work when assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling.

Further, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and it is necessary to take measures to prevent unauthorized removal, but since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, its removal Can be difficult.

The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided inside the lower door DD1. As a result, the main control board MS can be arranged on the back side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. For this reason, a physical distance can be secured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if an unauthorized entry is made through the gap of the lower door DD1, it reaches the main control board MS. It becomes difficult to improve security.

Further, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, when changing the specifications of the gaming machine 1, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, the reel symbol of the reel unit RU. Can be changed and the game contents can be changed collectively.

(System configuration of gaming machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 37, the gaming machine 1 includes, as main boards included in the system, a main control board MS, a sub control board SS, a reel drive board RD, a door relay board DS, a sub relay board SN, and a scaler board SK. The projector control board B23, the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL, and the screen drive control board CS are provided. Power is supplied to the main control board MS, the sub-control board SS, and the like from the power supply board DE1 of the power supply device DE when the power supply switch DE2 is on. In addition to the above-described components included in the system, the gaming machine 1 also includes, as known components, a 7-segment display unit 30 for digital display, an external centralized terminal board 31 for connecting an external display unit, a graphic board 40, and the like. Sub RAM board 41, sub ROM board 42, selector 50 for medal identification, door opening/closing monitor switch 51, BET switch 52, settlement switch 53, start switch 54, stop switch board 55, setting key type switch 56, LED board 60. An LED group 61 for production and decoration, a speaker group 62 for production, a 24h door monitoring unit 63, and a door monitoring switch 64 are provided. Descriptions of these known components will be omitted.

A general harness and an optical fiber cable are used to connect the respective boards and the like. For example, the main control board MS is connected to the reel drive board RD and the 7-segment display 30 via harness H so as to output control signals in one direction to the respective boards. The reel drive board RD is connected to the door relay board DS via the first optical fiber cable FC1 so as to optically transmit various signals to the door relay board DS in one direction. The door relay board DS is connected to the main control board MS via the second optical fiber cable FC2 so as to optically transmit various signals to the main control board MS in one direction. As a result, the main control board MS, the reel drive board RD, and the door relay board DS are loop-connected through the harness H and the optical fiber cables FC1 and FC2 so that commands and the like are simply transmitted in one direction. The sub relay board SN is connected to a security IC 306 described later of the main control board MS via an optical fiber cable (not shown), and the external centralized terminal board 31 is connected to a security IC 307 described later of the main control board MS by an optical fiber cable (not shown). ) Is connected through. The security ICs 306 and 307 of the main control board MS conceal communication data by, for example, encrypting a plaintext transmission command by the AES method.

The main control board MS is a board for controlling the main game operation of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 38, the main control board MS has a main CPU 300, a main RAM 301, a main ROM 302, a clock pulse generation circuit 303, a frequency divider 304, a master I/O communication LSI 305, and security ICs 306 and 307. For example, the main CPU 300 transmits a command for controlling the reel rotation operation and the medal payout operation to the reel drive board RD through the I/O communication LSI 305. Further, the main CPU 300 optically receives signals from various switches (50 to 56) connected to the door relay board DS through the I/O communication LSI 305, and performs predetermined processing based on these signals. .. Specific processing of the main control board MS (main CPU 300) will be described later.

The sub-control board SS is a board for mainly controlling the effects associated with the game of the gaming machine 1. The sub-control board SS is connected to the sub-relay board SN via a connector (BtoB: board-to-board), and the sub-relay board SN is connected to the scaler board SK via a harness H. Various signals are bidirectionally exchanged with these.

As shown in FIG. 39, the sub control board SS has a sub CPU 400, an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 401 having a backup function, and a real time clock (RTC: Real Time Clock) 402 which is a timekeeping circuit, and is replaced. As a possible expansion card, a graphic board 40, a sub RAM board 41, and a sub ROM board 42 are mounted by bus connection. The graphic substrate 40 includes a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 440 and a VRAM (video memory) 441. For example, the sub CPU 400 transmits a signal for displacing the projection planes E11a and F1a to the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 through the sub relay substrate SN and the screen drive control substrate CS (see FIG. 42). .. Further, the sub CPU 400 transmits a video signal for displaying a video on the projector device B2, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, etc. to the projector control board B23 and the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL through the scaler board SK (FIG. 43). reference). Specific processing of such a sub control board SS (sub CPU 400) will be described later.

The reel drive substrate RD is a substrate for controlling the rotating operation of the reels RL, RC, RR in the reel unit RU and controlling the medal payout operation by the hopper mechanism HP. As shown in FIG. 40, the reel drive board RD has an I/O communication LSI 310 that is a slave to the master I/O communication LSI 305 of the main control board MS, a reel motor driver 311, and a hopper motor driver 312. For example, the I/O communication LSI 305 outputs a payout signal from the hopper mechanism HP, a detection signal from a medal supply mechanism switch MHS that detects the dropping of medals to the hopper mechanism HP, a signal from the reel unit RU indicating the reel rotation state, etc. Are converted into optical signals according to a predetermined optical communication system, and these optical signals are transmitted to the main control board MS via the first optical fiber cable FC1 and the door relay board DS. Further, the I/O communication LSI 305 inputs a control signal from the main control board MS for instructing start and stop of reel rotation, payout of medals, etc. via the harness H, and outputs control signals corresponding to these control signals. , To the reel unit RU or the hopper mechanism HP through the reel motor driver 311 and the hopper motor driver 312. In this way, the main control board MS outputs a control signal by an electric signal, and the input to the main control board MS is performed by communication via the optical fiber cables FC1 and FC2, which is the reel unit RU and This is because there is a problem of responsiveness with the hopper mechanism HP (a problem of transmission time due to command transmission). In short, for example, the main control board M and the reel drive board RD are not connected via an optical fiber cable in order to prevent a large deviation from occurring in the stop position of the symbol due to a delay when the reel is stopped after the stop button is pressed. It is like this.

The door relay board DS is for unidirectionally relaying various signals from the reel drive board RD and various switches (50 to 56) provided on the door side to the main control board MS provided on the cabinet G side. It is the substrate of. As shown in FIG. 41, the door relay board DS has an I/O communication LSI 500 that is a slave to the I/O communication LSI 305 that is a master of the main control board MS, and an external input driver 501. For example, the I/O communication LSI 500 receives signals from various switches and the like (50 to 56) through the external input driver 501, converts them into optical signals according to a predetermined optical communication system, and converts these optical signals. It is transmitted to the main control board MS via the second optical fiber cable FC2. The I/O communication LSI 500 also receives a signal from the reel driver board RD and converts it into an optical signal according to a predetermined optical communication system, and the optical signal is transmitted via the second optical fiber cable FC2 to the main control board. Send to MS.

The sub relay board SN is a board for mainly relaying commands from the main control board MS to the sub control board SS and for relaying various signals between the production mechanism and the sub control board SS. .. As shown in FIG. 42, the sub relay board SN has a security IC 600, a sound IC 601, a digital amplifier 602, and an I2C controller 603. For example, the sub relay board SN transmits the video signal from the sub control board SS as a bypass signal to the scaler board SK, and sends the screen drive signal from the sub control board SS via the I2C controller 603 to the screen drive control board CS. And the detection signal of the door monitoring switch 64 and the like are exchanged with the 24h door monitoring unit 63. The security IC 600 receives a security command (various commands etc. from the encrypted main control board MS) from the main control board MS, converts this security command into plain text (decrypts the encrypted command), and then It is transmitted to the sub control board SS. The sound IC 601 receives the effect sound signal from the sub control board SS, and transmits a signal corresponding to this sound signal to the speaker group 62 through the digital amplifier 602. The I2C controller 603 receives a lighting signal for effect from the sub-control board SS, transmits a signal corresponding to the lighting signal to the LED board 60, and between the sub-control board SS and the screen drive control board CS. Exchange control signals and sensor signals.

The scaler board SK mainly receives the video signal for effect from the sub-control board SS, divides the video signal to generate video signals according to a plurality of video display numbers, and outputs these video signals to the projector device B2. And a substrate for transmitting to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As shown in FIG. 43, the scaler substrate SK includes an MCU (Micro Control Unit) (control LSI) 700, a multi-output scaler LSI (also referred to as resolution conversion LSI) 710, a V-by-one (registered trademark) HS transmitter 711, And SDRAM (DDR SDRAM/DDR2 SDRAM/DDR3 SDRAM etc.) 712. In the MCU 700, the sub relay board SN and the multi-output scaler LSI 710 are connected, and the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL and the projector control board B23 are connected. The multi-output scaler LSI 710 is connected with the sub-control board SS as an input source, and is also connected with the MCU 700, the V-by-one HS transmitter 711, the SDRAM 712, and the projector control board B23. The sub-liquid crystal I/F substrate SL is connected as an output destination to the V-by-one HS transmitter 711.

As shown in FIG. 44, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 constitutes an MCU interface (for example, PCI Express) 800 and an SDRAM interface (for example, PCI Express) 820 connected to an MCU 700 and an SDRAM 712 (not shown), and a resolution conversion output block. , Select Areas A to D 801 to 804, LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) (1) and (2) 811, 812 as differential interfaces, and LVTTL (Low Voltage Transistor Transistor) as input/output interfaces. (1), (2) 813, 814, and a DSF (Double Scaling Filter) (α) 821 and a DSF (β) 822 which form a video division block.

The multi-output scaler LSI 710 divides and converts the resolution of an LVDS signal as a video signal and outputs the divided signal. Specifically, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 divides a pair of LVDS signals (LDVS Dual: InPutA, InPutB) by differential transmission from the sub-control board SS into two with DSF(α)821 and DSF(β)822. Further, each of the four select areas A to D 801 to 804 converts into a predetermined resolution. Thereafter, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 mainly outputs the LVDS signal for projector display (single signal of LVDS1 and LVDS2) through the LVDS(1), (2) 811 and 812, and at the same time, LVTTL(1), (2) 813. , 814 to output LVTTL signals for sub liquid crystal display (RGB signals of LVTTL1 and LVTTL2). The LVDS signal output from the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 directly or through the MCU 700, and the LVTTL signal is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 or MCU 700. To be done. Specific processing of such a scaler substrate SK (MCU 700, multi-output scaler LSI 710) will be described later.

The sub-liquid crystal I/F substrate SL mainly relays a video signal (LVTTL signal) from the scaler substrate SK to the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19, and between the sub-control substrate SS and the touch panel DD19T via the scaler substrate SK. It is a substrate for relaying various signals. As shown in FIG. 45, the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL has an MCU 900, a V-by-one HS receiver 901, a liquid crystal driver IC 902, and an LED driver IC 903. For example, the sub-liquid crystal I/F substrate SL receives the video signal from the scaler substrate SK with the V-by-one HS receiver 901 and the MCU 900, and the liquid crystal driver IC 902 outputs a control signal for liquid crystal driving based on the video signal. The LED driver IC 903 transmits the control signal for driving the liquid crystal display backlight to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 while transmitting the control signal to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As a result, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image with a predetermined resolution based on the image signal. Further, the MCU 900 receives an operation signal from the touch panel DD19T, and transmits a signal corresponding to the operation signal to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. As a result, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS recognizes the input operation according to the operation signal from the touch panel DD19T. Although not shown in the figure, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 incorporates a temperature sensor such as a thermistor, and a temperature detection signal from this temperature sensor is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL, so that the sub liquid crystal is displayed. The MCU 900 of the I/F substrate SL can recognize the temperature during operation. Specific processing of such a sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL (MCU900) will be described later. Specific processing of the projector control board B23 (control LSI 230) shown in FIG. 21 will also be described later.

(Video split display pattern)
In the present embodiment, the sub control substrate SS or the sub control substrate SS is formed so as to form a divided display pattern as shown in FIG. 46 when displaying an image for presentation on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or when performing optical adjustment of the projector device B2. An image is displayed by the scaler substrate SK performing signal processing. That is, as shown in FIG. 46, the sub-control board SS has video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” with resolution 1280×800) and video data for sub-liquid crystal display (resolution 480×800. (Data block indicated by “β”) is combined with the LVDS dual-in signal composed of one combined signal to be transmitted to the scaler substrate SK.

The scaler substrate SK generates two video data α, β from the LVDS dual-in signal by the DSF(α), (β) 821, 822 of the multi-output scaler LSI 710, and the SDRAM 712 by buffering these video data α, β. Temporarily store in. The video data α and β are expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 in the array image as shown on the left side of FIG.

After that, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into a LVDS1 signal (video signal indicated by “A” of resolution 1280×800) for projector display through the select area A801 and LVDS(1)811. Then, the LVDS1 signal A is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 also converts the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 into a LVTTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display (a video signal indicated by “C” with a resolution of 480×800) through the select area C803 and LVTTL(1) 813. The LVTTL1 signal C is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVTTL1 signal C are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub control board SS without the resolution being converted. As a result, the projector device B2 can project an image with a resolution equivalent to 1280×800 pixels, and the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can display an image on the screen with a resolution equivalent to 480×800 pixels.

It should be noted that, as the split display pattern, modifications such as those shown in FIGS. 47 to 52 can be realized in accordance with changes in the display mode such as the number of screens (the number of display devices) displaying images and the enlargement ratio related to the resolution. ing.

(Modification 1)
For example, as shown in FIG. 47, the sub-control board SS includes video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” with resolution 1280×800) and video data for sub-liquid crystal display (resolution 1024×768). (Data block indicated by “β”) is combined with the LVDS dual-in signal composed of one combined signal to be transmitted to the scaler substrate SK.

At this time, the scaler board SK inputs the two video data α and β divided by the DSFs (α) and (β) 821 and 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal as shown in the left side of FIG. The array image of the pattern 1 or the input pattern 2 is developed in the memory space of the SDRAM 712.

Then, if the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK, as shown in the upper right of FIG. (1) and (2) 811 and 812 are used to convert into an LVDS1+2 signal for projector display (a video signal indicated by “A+B” with a resolution of 1280×800), and this LVDS1+2 signal A+B is transmitted to the projector control board. At the same time, the MCU 700 transmits the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D 803, 804 and LVTTL(1), (2) 813, 814 to the LVTTL1+2 signal for sub liquid crystal display (“C+D of resolution 1024×768”). Image signal), and transmits this LVTTL1+2 signal C+D to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1+2 signal A+B and the LVTTL1 signal C+D are transmitted at the resolution designated by the sub-control board SS without converting the resolution. As a result, the projector device (for example, WXGA: Abbreviation for Wide-XGA) projects an image at a resolution corresponding to the number of pixels of 1280×800, and the sub display device DD20 is operated by the sub liquid crystal display device (for example, XGA: eXtended Graphics Array). The image can be displayed on the screen with a resolution equivalent to 1024×768 pixels.

On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK outputs the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 to the select areas A, B 801, 802, and as shown in the lower right part of FIG. Through the LVDS (1), (2) 811, 812, for example, it is converted into an LVDS1+2 signal A+B having a resolution of 1920×1080 according to the set value for changing the enlargement ratio, and this LVDS1+2 signal A+B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 passes the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D 803, 804 and LVTTL(1), (2) 813, 814, for example, at a resolution of 1280×800 according to the set value for changing the enlargement ratio. Of the LVTTL1+2 signal C+D, and the LVTTL1+2 signal C+D is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1+2 signal A+B and the LVTTL1 signal C+D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub-control board SS, and in the projector device and the sub liquid crystal display device, the resolution suitable for the display characteristics unique to each device is appropriate. The image can be displayed on.

(Modification 2)
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 48, the sub-control board SS includes video data for projector display (data block of resolution 1280×800 indicated by “α”) and two video data for sub-liquid crystal display (resolution). An LVDS dual-in signal composed of one combined signal is generated by synthesizing an 800×480 data block indicated by “β-1” and a resolution 800×480 data block indicated by “β-2”. Send to.

At this time, the scaler substrate SK outputs the three video data α, β-1, and β-2 divided by the DSFs (α) and (β) 821 and 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal as shown in FIG. The array image of any one of the input patterns 1 to 3 as shown on the left side is developed in the memory space of the SDRAM 712.

If the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK outputs the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 to the select areas A, B 801, 802 and LVDS as shown in the upper right of FIG. (1) and (2) 811 and 812 are used to convert to an LVDS1+2 signal for projector display (a video signal indicated by “A+B” with a resolution of 1280×800), and this LVDS1+2 signal A+B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 sends the two video data β-1 and β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D 803 and 804 and LVTTL (1) and (2) 813 and 814 to the LVTTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display. And LVTTL2 signals (video signals of 800×480 resolution indicated by “C” and “D”), and these LVTTL1 signals C and LVTTL2 signals D are transmitted through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. Send to. In this case, the LVDS1+2 signal A+B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at the resolution designated by the sub-control board SS without the resolution being converted. As a result, the projector device (for example, FHD: Abbreviation of Full-HD) projects an image at a resolution equivalent to 1280×800 pixels, and is a sub liquid crystal display device that is different from the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. When a sub liquid crystal display device (for example, WXGA) is provided, an image can be displayed on each screen with a resolution equivalent to 800×480 pixels.

On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK outputs the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 to the select areas A, B 801, 802 and Through the LVDS (1), (2) 811, 812, for example, it is converted into an LVDS1+2 signal A+B having a resolution of 1920×1080 according to the set value for changing the enlargement ratio, and this LVDS1+2 signal A+B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 sets the two image data β-1 and β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D 803 and 804 and LVTTL (1) and (2) 813 and 814 to set the enlargement ratio. Corresponding to the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D having a resolution of 1280×800, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. .. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A+B and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub control board SS, and the projector device (for example, FHD) and the two sub liquid crystal display devices (for example, WXGA) are transmitted. In (), an image can be appropriately displayed at a resolution suitable for the display characteristics unique to each device.

(Modification 3)
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the sub-control board SS includes two video data for projector display (data blocks indicated by “α-1” and “α-2” with a resolution of 800×480) and a sub-image. By combining two video data for liquid crystal display (data blocks indicated by “β-1” and “β-2” with resolution 800×480), an LVDS dual-in signal composed of one combined signal is generated by the scaler board. Send to SK.

At this time, the scaler substrate SK has four video data α-1, α-2, β-1, β- divided by the DSF(α), (β) 821, 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal. 2 is expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 with an array image of any of the input patterns 1 to 3 as shown on the left side of FIG.

Then, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK selects the two video data α-1 and α-2 read from the SDRAM 712 as shown in the upper right of FIG. 49, unless the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set. Through the areas A, B 801, 802 and LVDS (1), (2) 811, 812, converted to LVDS1 signal and LVDS2 signal for projector display (video signal indicated by “A” and “B” of resolution 800×480), The LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B are transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 sends the two video data β-1 and β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D 803 and 804 and LVTTL (1) and (2) 813 and 814 to the LVTTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display. And LVTTL2 signals (video signals of 800×480 resolution indicated by “C” and “D”), and these LVTTL1 signals C and LVTTL2 signals D are transmitted through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. Send to. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and LVDS2 signal B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at the resolution designated by the sub control board SS without resolution conversion. As a result, the projector device projects an image at a resolution equivalent to 800×480 pixels, and when the sub liquid crystal device DD19 and two other display devices are provided as the sub liquid crystal device, 800× Images can be displayed on each screen with a resolution equivalent to 480 pixels.

On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK outputs the two video data α-1, α-2 read from the SDRAM 712 as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 49. Through the select areas A, B 801, 802 and LVDS (1), (2) 811, 812, for example, LVDS1 signal A and LVDS2 signal B having a resolution of 1280×720 are converted according to the set value for changing the enlargement ratio, and these LVDS1 The signal A and the LVDS2 signal B are transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 sets the two image data β-1 and β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D 803 and 804 and LVTTL (1) and (2) 813 and 814 to set the enlargement ratio. Corresponding to, for example, LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D having a resolution of 1024×768, and these LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. .. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub control board SS, and in the projector device and the three sub liquid crystal display devices, It is possible to properly display an image at a resolution suitable for the display characteristics unique to the device.

(Modifications 4 to 6)
Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the sub-control board SS includes video data for projector display (data blocks indicated by “α” or the like) and video data for sub liquid crystal display (“β” or the like). In some cases, a plurality of LVDS single-in signals corresponding to the respective data blocks are sequentially transmitted to the scaler substrate SK by sequentially outputting the data blocks shown in FIG. Even in such a case, it is possible to separately output the LVDS signal and the LVTTL signal showing a predetermined resolution by the signal processing similar to the above-described divided display pattern. In the projector device and the sub liquid crystal display device, each device is unique. It is possible to properly display an image at a resolution suitable for the display characteristics of. In addition, in this embodiment and its modifications 1 to 6, three types of resolutions of FHD, WXGA, and XGA are illustrated. Array), a display device corresponding to a resolution of 2K, 4K, or the like may be used to display a more vivid image.

The scaler board may be capable of outputting a plurality of video signals to one display means. For example, the scaler board may generate and output a video signal for partial screen display and a video signal for the remaining partial screen display from one video data. Further, the scaler board may generate and output a left-eye video signal and a right-eye video signal for 3D display from one video data. According to this, an image can be displayed by a 3D display method using parallax based on the left-eye video signal and the right-eye video signal from the scaler substrate, and the projector device can stereoscopically display not only by projection mapping but also by parallax. It is possible to display images with a feeling and power.

(Communication specifications of gaming machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 53, as the communication specifications between the sub control board SS and the scaler board SK, between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23, and between the scaler board SK and the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL, there are a communication format and a communication. The speed (baud rate), data length, stop bit, presence/absence of parity, protocol, and communication format are defined as shown in the figure. Although the ID is shown separately for easy viewing of the transmission source ID and the transmission destination ID, it is actually 1-byte single data. For example, the ID when the sub-control board SS transmits data to the scaler board SK is 21H as the data indicating the ID by combining the transmission source ID: 01H and the transmission destination ID: 20H. In the following description, the communication line between the sub-control board SS and the scaler board SK is referred to as a first serial line, the communication line between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23 is referred to as a second serial line, and the scaler board The communication line between the SK and sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL may be referred to as a third serial line.

(List of commands between each board)
As shown in FIG. 54, the commands exchanged between the scaler board SK and the sub control board SS are, for example, “start parameter request”, “parameter request”, “status”, “command” transmitted from the scaler board SK. “Reception confirmation” and “error notification” are defined, and as commands transmitted from the sub-control board SS, for example, “start parameter request confirmation”, “setting completion”, “status request”, “status request completion”, "Output screen division setting number", "output screen resolution setting", "input screen division setting number", and "input screen resolution setting" are defined. The contents and parameters (including the data position (D1 to n) in the communication format) of each command are as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55, the commands exchanged between the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL and the sub control substrate SS are, for example, “start parameter request” and “parameter” as commands transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. “Request”, “status”, “reception confirmation”, and “error notification” are defined, and commands transmitted from the sub-control board SS include, for example, “start parameter request confirmation”, “setting completion”, and “status request”. , "Status request completion", "sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting", and "sub liquid crystal brightness setting". The contents and parameters of each command (including the data positions (D1 to Dn) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 56, the commands exchanged between the projector control board B23 and the sub control board SS are, for example, "start parameter request", "parameter request", and "reception confirmation" as the commands transmitted from the projector control board B23. , "Error notification", "LED temperature", "FAN (fan) speed", "LED brightness", "horizontal adjustment value", "vertical adjustment value", "focus adjustment value", "drift correction temperature" Is specified, and the commands transmitted from the sub-control board SS include, for example, “start parameter request confirmation”, “setting completion”, “status request”, “status request completion”, “LED brightness setting”, “LED brightness setting”, Keystone distortion correction value, White color temperature setting, Horizontal position offset, Horizontal position adjustment value, Vertical position offset, Vertical position adjustment value, Brightness setting, Contrast setting, “Gamma setting”, “focus offset”, “focus adjustment value”, “focus drift correction value”, and “test pattern” are defined. The contents and parameters (including the data position (D1 to n) in the communication format) of each command are as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 57, the error information transmitted from the scaler board SK by the error notification transmission command includes "self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality", "scaler output setting abnormality", "scaler input setting abnormality", and "WDT". (Watchdog timer)-scaler", and parameters (including the data position "D1" in the communication format), error occurrence conditions, and error states are defined for each error. The error information transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL by the error notification transmission command includes "self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality", "touch panel input abnormality", "sub liquid crystal screen setting abnormality", and "sub liquid crystal". "Abnormal temperature" and "WDT-sub liquid crystal", and parameters (including the data position "D1" in the communication format), error occurrence conditions, and error states are defined for each error. The error information transmitted from the projector control board B23 by the error notification transmission command includes "LED (R) temperature abnormality", "LED (G) temperature abnormality", "LED (B) temperature abnormality", and "FAN 1 rotation". "Error", "FAN2 rotation error", "FAN3 rotation error", "Voltage error", "Self-diagnosis (RAM check) error", "WDT-DLP". Each error has a parameter (data in communication format). The position "D1" or "D2" is included), an error occurrence condition, and an error state are defined. An error management area of a scaler substrate SK, a projector control substrate B23, and a sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL described later (memory map of SDRAM shown in FIG. 96, memory map of DRAM shown in FIG. 106, memory of DRAM shown in FIG. 116). The error information and error detection conditions set in (see map) are applied as they are.

(Memory map of adjustment PC 1000)
As shown in FIG. 58, in the memory (DRAM) of the adjustment PC 1000, a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, and a status storage area are provided as work areas for predetermined application software when performing optical adjustment on the projector device B2. The area is provided. In the storage medium (HDD) of the adjustment PC 1000, horizontal position A to E adjustment values, vertical position A to E adjustment values, focus positions A to E adjustment values, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion are recorded as items related to optical adjustment. A correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, test pattern, horizontal position A to E offset, vertical position A to E offset, focus position offset A to E, etc. are provided. Specific processing of the adjustment PC 1000 will be described later.

(Processing of main control board MS)
[Processing when power is turned on by the main CPU 300]
FIG. 59 shows the processing when the power is turned on by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. As shown in the figure, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 300 performs a power-on process (S101). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines, for example, whether the backup is normal or whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and performs initialization according to the determination result.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (unit game) (S102). In this process, the main CPU 300 initializes, for example, by designating a storage area for initialization at the end of one game. As a result, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 301 are cleared.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S103). In this process, the main CPU 300 sets an effective line based on the number of inserted sheets and determines whether or not a start operation is possible.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a random value acquisition process (S104). In this process, the main CPU 300 extracts and acquires a random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area. The random number value is used in the next internal lottery process.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs an internal lottery process (S105). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines an internal winning combination.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs reel stop initialization processing (S106). In this process, the main CPU 300 initializes the area related to the control for stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a start command generation/storage process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a start command and stores the generated start command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The start command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub control board SS by the command transmission process. The start command includes various information (internal winning combination, game state, etc.) necessary for performance such as internal winning combination. Thereby, the sub-control board SS can perform an effect according to the start operation.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs wait processing (S108). In this process, the main CPU 300 waits until a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the previous game so as not to accept a start operation.

Next, the main CPU 300 executes reel rotation start processing (S109). In this process, the main CPU 300 requests the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a reel rotation start command generation/storage process (S110). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a reel rotation start command and stores the generated reel rotation start command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The reel rotation start command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. As a result, the sub-control board SS can recognize the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, and can determine the timing of executing various effects and the like.

Next, the main CPU 300 executes a pull-in priority storage process (S111). In this processing, the main CPU 300 determines the attraction priority order of the winning combination that can be displayed, and stores the attraction priority data in a predetermined storage area.

Next, the main CPU 300 executes reel stop control processing (S112). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR based on the timing of the stop operation by the player, the internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a winning search process (S113). In this process, the main CPU 300 collates the symbol combination and the symbol combination table displayed along the activated line after the reels RL, RC, RR are stopped, determines the display combination, and also determines the number of medals to be paid out. To do.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a winning operation command generation/storing process (S114). In this processing, the main CPU 300 generates a winning operation command and stores the generated winning operation command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The winning operation command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board MS to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. As a result, the sub-control board SS can determine the effect contents and the like according to the winning.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs medal payout processing (S115). In this process, the main CPU 300 pays out medals based on the number of medals paid out determined in the process of S113.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a medal payout end command generation/storage process (S116). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a medal payout end command and stores the generated medal payout end command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The medal payout end command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board MS to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. Thereby, the sub-control board SS can recognize the end of payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a bonus end check process (S117). In this processing, the main CPU 300 ends the operation of the bonus game when the condition for ending the bonus game is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a bonus operation check process (S118). In this process, the main CPU 300 starts the operation of the bonus game when the condition for starting the bonus game is satisfied. The main CPU 300 operates the replay game when the replay condition is satisfied. After executing S118, the main CPU 300 shifts to the process of S102 again.

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 ms)]
FIG. 60 shows an interrupt process by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 300 periodically saves registers in a predetermined cycle (1.1172 ms) (S121).

Next, the main CPU 300 performs an input port check process (S122). In this process, the main CPU 300 confirms the presence or absence of an input signal from the door relay board DS. For example, the main CPU 300 stores signals from the start switch 54, the stop switch substrate 55, etc. for each interrupt process. Further, the main CPU 300 stores an input state command according to an input signal from various switches in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The stored input state command is transmitted to the sub control board SS in the data transmission process described later. As a result, various effects can be executed according to the start operation of the unit game and the stop operation of the reels RL, RC, RR.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs timer update processing (S123). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of updating the value of the timer set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 301.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs an effect timer update process (S124). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of updating the value of the effect timer set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 301.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs reel control processing (S125). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of controlling the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR. Specifically, the main CPU 300 starts rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR in response to a request to start rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, that is, a start operation, and at a constant speed. Control is performed so that the reels RL, RC, and RR rotate. Further, in accordance with the stop operation, control is performed so that the rotations of the reels RL, RC, RR corresponding to the stop operation are stopped.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs 7SEG drive processing (S126). In this processing, the main CPU 300 causes the 7-segment display 30 to display the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a data transmission process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 300 transmits the command stored in the transmission data storage area to the sub control board SS via the security IC 306.

Next, the main CPU 300 restores the register (S128). Then, the main CPU 300 ends the interrupt process.

(Memory map of sub control board SS)
As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the sub RAM substrate 41, the SRAM 401, and the sub ROM substrate 42 of the sub control substrate SS are provided with various areas for performing optical adjustment on the projector device B2.

As shown in FIG. 61, on the sub RAM board 41, a part of a work area for the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS to perform various controls (for example, an area used in a task system or an LED control task described later). Areas used in each task such as etc. are not shown), sub device reception storage area, sub device transmission storage area, scaler control reception storage area, sub LCD control reception storage area, projector control reception storage area, flag Storage area, scaler setting value storage area, scaler setting confirmation storage area, sub LCD setting value storage area, sub LCD setting confirmation storage area, touch panel input storage area, projector setting value storage area, projector status storage area, drift correction storage area It is provided. For example, in the flag storage area, EXT reception flag, reception completion flag, scaler setting completion flag, sub liquid crystal setting completion flag, projector setting completion flag, scaler setting changing flag, sub liquid crystal setting changing flag, projector setting changing flag The scaler startup setting flag, the sub liquid crystal startup setting flag, and the projector startup setting flag are stored. The touch panel input storage area stores an input type, an input X coordinate, and an input Y coordinate. A drift correction monitoring counter and a focus correction value storage area are provided in the drift correction storage area. Note that the sub device means the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 controlled by the sub control substrate SS, the touch panel DD19T, and the projector device B2, as well as the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. The stored information will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the SRAM 401, as a part of the data that can be backed up (for example, the data of the area where the gaming state, the RT state, etc. are backed up is not shown), the scaler set value storage area and the sub liquid crystal A setting value storage area and a projector setting value storage area are provided. In the scaler set value storage area, as the scaler set value, the output screen division setting number, the input screen division setting number, the output screen 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, the output screen 1 to 4 vertical resolution, the input screen 1 and 2 horizontal resolution, the input The screen 1 and vertical resolution are stored. In the sub liquid crystal set value storage area, sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and sub liquid crystal brightness are stored as sub liquid crystal set values. In the projector setting value storage area, horizontal position A to E offsets, horizontal position A to E adjustment values, vertical position A to E offsets, vertical position A to E adjustment values, focus position offsets are set as projector setting values. A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, and test pattern are stored. These set values will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the sub-ROM board 42, a part of fixed data (control program of the sub-control board SS, various lottery values necessary for game, video data, sound data, LED data, accessory (screen A scaler initial value area, a sub liquid crystal initial value area, and a projector initial value area are provided as operation data and the like (not shown). In the scaler initial value area, the number of output screen division settings, the number of input screen division settings, baud rate, data length, parity, stop, output screens 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, output screens 1 to 4 vertical resolution, input screens 1 and 2 horizontal The resolution, the input screen 1 and the vertical resolution are stored. The sub liquid crystal initial value area stores sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and sub liquid crystal brightness. In the projector initial value area, horizontal position A to E offset, vertical position A to E offset, focus position offset A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, contrast setting, Gamma settings, white color temperature settings, brightness settings, and test patterns are stored. The stored information will be described later.

(Processing of sub-control board SS)
[Processing when power is turned on by the sub CPU 400]
FIG. 63 shows the processing when the power is turned on by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 400 performs an initialization process of the sub control board SS (S131). In this process, the sub CPU 400 initializes the task system such as error checking of the SRAM 401 and initialization of the sub RAM substrate 41 (RAM clear and backup data set of SRAM 401). The task system is configured to include an LED control task, a sound control task, a screen accessory control task, a main task, a main board communication task, an animation task, and a sub device task, which will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the LED control task (S132). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of an LED control task described later (see FIG. 64).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates a sound control task (S133). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a sound control task described later (see FIG. 65).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the screen accessory control task (S134). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a screen accessory control task described later (see FIG. 66).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the main task (S135). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a main task described later (see FIG. 69).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the main board communication task (S136). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a main board communication task described later (see FIG. 70).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates an animation task (S137). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of an animation task described later (see FIG. 72).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates a sub device task (S138). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a sub device task described later (see FIG. 73).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a power failure recovery process (S139). In this process, the sub CPU 400 performs a process of restoring backup data at the time of power failure. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process when the power is turned on.

[LED control task]
FIG. 64 shows an LED control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs an initialization process of LED-related data (S141).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs LED data analysis processing (S142).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an LED effect execution process (S143).

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 4 msec (S144). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S142.

[Sound control task]
FIG. 65 shows a sound control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs an initialization process of sound-related data (S151).
Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound data analysis processing (S152).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sound effect execution process (S153). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S152.

[Screen accessory control task]
FIG. 66 shows a screen accessory control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory test process in order to confirm whether or not the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 when the power is turned on normally operate (S161). For example, as a test, first, the reel screen mechanism E1 is moved to the display position and then to the storage position, and then the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the display position and then to the storage position. Then, when an abnormality is detected during the test operation of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, the projector device B2 displays the abnormality and requests the sound control task to output a message indicating the abnormality occurrence.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is registered screen accessory data (S162). In this process, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the screen accessory data requesting the operation of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 exists in a predetermined area of the sub RAM substrate 41. If the screen accessory data is present (S162: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S163. If the screen accessory data does not exist (S162: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S164.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory motion construction process (S163). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 constructs operation patterns of the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 based on the screen accessory data. As an operation pattern of the screen drive mechanisms E1 and F1, for example, when character image data for projecting an image on the reel screen mechanism F1 is registered in a state where an image is projected on the front screen mechanism E1 (front screen mechanism (If the accessory data for instructing the storage operation for E1 is not registered), the sub CPU 400 that executes the screen accessory operation construction process sets the storage operation pattern of the front screen mechanism E1 and After the mechanism E1 is stored in the upper part, the operation pattern is constructed in the order of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the display surface.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory control process (S164). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 2 msec (S165). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S162.

[Screen accessory control processing]
FIG. 67 shows a screen accessory control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 corresponds to the operation start step from the operation patterns of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 constructed by the screen accessory action construction processing described above, and changes the screen (projection target). It is determined whether or not (S171). If the screen change occurs in the operation start step (S171: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of the next S172. If it is not the operation start step or the screen change does not occur (S171: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S173.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs focus change request processing (S172). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a front screen control process (S173). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the operation of the front screen drive mechanism E2 to move the front screen mechanism E1.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs reel screen control processing (S174). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the operation of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to move the reel screen mechanism F1.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the focus standby counter is -1 (S175). The focus standby counter is a subtraction counter for generating a predetermined waiting time when changing the focus position with respect to the projector device B2. When the value of the focus standby counter is -1 (S175: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process. When the value of the focus standby counter is not -1 (S175: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S176.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the focus standby counter is 0 (S176). When the value of the focus standby counter is 0 (S176: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S178. When the value of the focus standby counter is not 0 (S176: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S177.

Next, the sub CPU 400 subtracts 1 from the value of the focus standby counter (S177). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process.

In step S178, the sub CPU 400 requests the projector device B2 to change the focus position after the change. In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores focus position setting change request data in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the current focus position before the change and the focus position after the change. Thereby, for example, when the projection target of the image is switched from the front screen mechanism E1 to the reel screen mechanism F1 or vice versa, the projector device B2 changes the focus position setting. The focus mechanism 242 can be controlled based on the request data, and the projection lens 210 can be focused at the focus position corresponding to each of the screen mechanisms E1 and F2.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 to the focus standby counter (S179). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process.

[Focus change request processing]
FIG. 68 shows focus change request processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 acquires the current focus position (focus positions A to E offset) from the current operating state of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 (S181).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the changed focus position (focus positions A to E offset) from the operation pattern of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 constructed from the registered accessory data (S182).

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the number of focus change pulses (S183). The focus change pulse number is the pulse number of the motor drive signal supplied to the focus motor 242C when changing the focus position, and is the required number of pulses corresponding to the amount obtained by subtracting the changed focus position from the current focus position. Calculated as an absolute value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus adjustment time (S184). The focus adjustment time is the actual operating time of the focus mechanism 242 that changes the focus position. For example, when the motor drive signal for the focus motor 242C is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, the pulse width is doubled (pulse width). It is calculated by multiplying the period) by the number of focus change pulses obtained in S183.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a transmission time (setting change transmission time) for changing the setting of the focus position through communication with the projector control board B23 (S185). This setting change transmission time is the transmission time 1 of the data exchanged between the sub-control board SS and the scaler board SK and the transmission time of the data exchanged between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23 as the focus position is changed. It is calculated as the time including the time 2. The transmission time 1 is obtained by multiplying the number of transmission bits, which is the number of data×(data length+parity+start+stop), by 1/baud rate 1. Similarly, the transmission time 2 is obtained by multiplying the number of transmission bits by 1/baud rate 2. In this embodiment, the baud rate 1 is 38400 bps, the baud rate 2 is 19200 bps, the data length is 8 bits, there is no parity, and the start and stop bits are 1 bit. The transmission time 1 and the transmission time 2 obtained by using these numerical values Is calculated.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus change time (S186). The focus change time is calculated as a time obtained by combining the setting change transmission time obtained in S185 and the focus adjustment time obtained in S184.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 has been changed (S187). When changing to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S188. If the change is not to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S189.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the moving time 1 when moving the front screen mechanism E1 to a predetermined position (S188). This movement time 1 is the actual operating time of the front screen drive mechanism E2. For example, if the motor drive signal for the drive motor E25 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, its pulse width is doubled. It is calculated by multiplying the required time by the required number of motor pulses. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S190.

In S189, the sub CPU 400 calculates the movement time 2 for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the predetermined position. This movement time 2 is the actual working time of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. For example, if the motor drive signal for the drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, its pulse width is doubled. It is calculated by multiplying the required time by the required number of motor pulses.

Next, the sub CPU 400 divides the difference between the movement times 1 and 2 obtained in S188 or S189 and the focus change time obtained in S186 by 2 corresponding to 2 msec of the processing cycle of the screen accessory control task, and calculates the result. A value corresponding to time is set in the focus standby counter (S190). As a result, with respect to the operation of moving the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the predetermined position and the operation of changing the focus position, the value which is just the required time difference between them is not set in the focus standby counter. The focus position can be changed to a predetermined position at the timing when the movement operation of F1 is completed. That is, it is possible to project an image with good image quality in focus on the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 just after the movement by changing the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is focus interlock when displaying an image (for example, "1" when the focus interlock flag (not shown) is present, and "0" when there is no focus interlock (S191). .. The focus interlocking means that the focus position is continuously changed in conjunction with the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. When there is no focus link (S191: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S192. If there is focus interlocking (S191: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus change request process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets 0 to the focus standby counter (S192). That is, when focus movement is not performed, the focus position is immediately changed at the beginning of the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. When focus movement is performed, the focus positions are changed at the timing when the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is ended. The change of is completed. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus change request process.

[Main task]
FIG. 69 shows a main task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) vertical initialization signal (S201).

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a VSYNC interrupt that occurs in a 33 msec cycle (S202).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs drawing processing (S203).

Next, the sub CPU 400 resets the watchdog timer (WDT) (S204). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S202.

[Main board communication task]
FIG. 70 shows a main board communication task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 initializes the communication message queue (S211).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires a reception command from the main control board MS from the communication message queue (S212).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a received command (S213). If there is a received command (S213: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S214. When there is no received command (S213: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S218.

Next, the sub CPU 400 checks the received command (S214).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received command is a valid command (S215). When the received command is a valid command (S215: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S216. If the received command is not a valid command (S215: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S218. The received command is valid when, for example, the value of the command is in the range of 01H to 10H.

Next, the sub CPU 400 creates game information from the received command and stores the game information in a predetermined area (not shown) of the sub RAM board 41 (S216). This game information includes, for example, an internal winning combination, a game state, a set value, the number of bonus games, and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs command analysis processing (S217). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 10 msec (S218). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S212.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 71 shows command analysis processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a command consistency determination process (S221).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs effect content determination processing (S222).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an animation data determination process (S223).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs LED data determination processing (S224).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound data determination processing (S225).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs screen accessory data determination processing (S226).

Next, the sub CPU 400 registers each determined data in a predetermined area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S227). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the command analysis process.

[Anime task]
FIG. 72 shows an animation task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 checks the change from the previous game information (S231).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a main object control process (S232).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a main animation task management process (S233).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub object control process (S234).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub animation task management process (S235).

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of 33 msec, for example (S236). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S231.

Subdevice task
FIG. 73 shows a sub device task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub device initialization process (S241). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler control process (S242). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control process (S243). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector control processing (S244). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of 10 msec, for example (S245). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S242.

[Sub-device reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 74 shows a sub device reception interrupt process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. The sub device reception interrupt process is a reception interrupt process for fetching communication data transmitted by the scaler substrate SK in response to an external request from the sub device (sub liquid crystal display device DD19, touch panel DD19T, projector device B2, etc.). As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received data from the sub device is'STX' indicating the start of the data (S251). When the received data is'STX (Start of TeXt: 02H)' (S251: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S252. If the received data is not'STX' (S251: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S253.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “OFF”, and clears the sub device reception storage area (S252). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

In S253, the sub CPU 400 saves the received data in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received data from the sub device is “ETX” indicating the end of the data (S254). When the received data is'ETX (End of TeXt:03H)' (S254: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S255. When the received data is not'ETX' (S254: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S256.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the ETX reception flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to "ON" (S255). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

In S256, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the ETX reception flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is'ON'. When the ETX reception flag is “ON” (S256: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S257. When the ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S256: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub device reception data sum check process (S257).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S257 is normal (S258). When the sum value is normal (S258: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S260. When the sum value is not normal (S258: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S259. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when determining whether or not the sum value is normal, the received data up to'ETX' excluding'STX' of the received data is added and received after'ETX'. The matching of the sum value is determined by comparing the received data with the received data. The method of calculating the sum value is not limited to the addition formula, but a subtraction formula or an exclusive OR (also called BCC) may be used.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (clears the sub device reception storage area) (S259). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

In S260, the sub CPU 400 sets the reception completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “ON”. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

[Sub device initialization process]
FIG. 75 shows a sub device initialization process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 initializes a first serial line which is a communication line with the scaler substrate SK (S271).

Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the scaler set value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the scaler set value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S272). As shown in FIG. 62, the scaler setting values are the output screen division setting number, the input screen division setting number, the output screens 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, the output screens 1 to 4 vertical resolution, the input screens 1 and 2 horizontal resolution, and the input. The screen profile corresponds to a device profile showing the control characteristics of the scaler substrate SK such as the vertical resolution.

Next, the sub CPU 400 checks the range of the scaler set value stored in the scaler set value storage area (S273).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether all the scaler setting values in the scaler setting value storage area are within the valid range (S274). As shown in FIG. 54, the effective range of the scaler set value is defined in advance as a transmission command from the sub control board SS. If all the scaler setting values are within the valid range (S274: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S276. If at least one scaler setting value is not within the valid range (S274: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S275.

Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the scaler set value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the scaler set value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 as initial values (S275). The initial value of the scaler setting value is written in advance in the scaler initial value area of the sub ROM substrate 42, as shown in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S276). As shown in FIG. 62, the sub liquid crystal set value corresponds to a device profile showing the display characteristics of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 such as the sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, the sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and the sub liquid crystal brightness.

Next, the sub CPU 400 checks the range of the sub liquid crystal set value stored in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (S277).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not all the sub liquid crystal set values in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area are within the valid range (S278). If all the sub liquid crystal set values are within the valid range (S278: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S280. If at least one sub liquid crystal set value is not within the valid range (S278: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S279.

Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 as initial values (S279). The initial value of the sub liquid crystal set value is written in advance in the sub liquid crystal initial value area of the sub ROM substrate 42, as shown in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S280). As shown in FIG. 62, the projector setting values are horizontal position A to E adjustment values, horizontal position A to E offsets, vertical position A to E adjustment values, vertical position A to E offsets, focus position offsets. A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, focus drift correction value A to E correspond to device profiles indicating display characteristics of the projector device B2.

Next, the sub CPU 400 checks the range of projector setting values stored in the projector setting value storage area (S281).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether all the projector setting values in the projector setting value storage area are within the valid range (S282). When all the projector setting values are within the valid range (S282: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S284. If at least one projector setting value is not within the valid range (S282: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S283.

Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 as initial values (S283). The initial value of the projector setting value is written in advance in the projector initial value area of the sub ROM substrate 42, as shown in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting completion flag, the sub liquid crystal setting completion flag, and the projector setting completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “OFF” (S284). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device initialization process.

[Scaler control processing]
FIG. 76 shows a scaler control process performed by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is'scaler (see ID: 02H shown in FIG. 53)'. It is determined (S291). When the transmission source ID indicates “scaler” (S291: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S292. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “scaler” (S291: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a received data consistency check process for controlling the scaler board SK (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of '01H' to '05H' indicating the transmission command from the scaler board SK shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293). When the consistency of the received data is abnormal (S293: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S294. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S295.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards (clears) the data in the sub device reception storage area because the consistency of the received data is abnormal (invalid received data) (S294). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

In S295, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler control reception time process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

[Processing when receiving the scaler control]
FIG. 77 shows the processing when the scaler control is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies the reception data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to the scaler control reception storage area (S301).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is a “start parameter request” (S302). When the received command is “activation parameter request (see CMD:01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” (S302: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S303. When the received command is not the "activation parameter request" (S302: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S304.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs processing when a scaler activation parameter request is received (S303). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

In S304, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'parameter request (see CMD: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the received command is'parameter request' (S304: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S305. When the received command is not the'parameter request' (S304: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S311.

Next, the sub CPU 400 issues a request to change the scaler set value (see CMD: 02H and D1:01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54) based on the value of the parameter (see FIG. 54) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether there is any (S305). When there is a request to change the scaler setting value (S305: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S306. When there is no request to change the scaler setting value (S305: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S309.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “ON” (S306).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (scaler setting value to be changed) from the scaler setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) (S307).

Next, the sub CPU 400 uses the acquired setting change content as an argument (a general name of the parameter on the software, which indicates that the calling source passes the parameter to the called subroutine function (process)), and the scaler setting change process. Is performed (S308). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 79. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

In S309, the sub CPU 400 sends a status request (see CMD: 02H and D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 54) from the scaler board SK based on the value of the parameter included in the parameter request reception command (see FIG. 54). It is determined whether or not there is. When there is a status request (S309: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S310. If there is no status request (S309: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S310). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

In S311, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'status (see CMD:03H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the received command is'status' (S311: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S312. When the received command is not'status' (S311: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S313.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler status command reception process (S312). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

In S313, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'receipt confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the received command is'acknowledgement' (S313: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S314. If the received command is not'acknowledgement' (S313: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S315.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler reception confirmation reception time process (S314). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

In S315, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'error notification (see CMD:05H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the received command is “error notification” (S315: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S316. When the received command is not “error notification” (S315: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs processing when a scaler error occurs (S316).

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a sound scaler error occurrence output to the speaker group 62 in order to notify the error of the scaler substrate SK by sound, and at the same time, to the LED group 61 in order to notify the error in the light emission mode. An LED scaler error occurrence lighting request is made (S317). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

[Processing when receiving a scaler startup parameter request]
FIG. 78 shows the processing when the scaler activation parameter request is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a startup parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S321). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command of “start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 01H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” to the scaler substrate SK.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler startup setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “ON” (S322). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler activation parameter request.

[Scaler setting change processing]
FIG. 79 shows the scaler setting change processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change contents of the scaler setting value received as an argument (S331).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the output screen division setting number (S332). When the setting change content is the output screen division setting number (S332: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S333. When the setting change content is not the output screen division setting number (S332: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S334.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an output screen division setting number command transmission process (S333). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the output screen division setting number in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and specifies the output patterns 0 to 3 as the output screen division setting number 1 to 4'output screen. The command of the division set number (see CMD: 05H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)' is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change processing.

In S334, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the output screen resolution setting. When the content of the setting change is the output screen resolution setting (S334: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S335. When the content of the setting change is not the output screen resolution setting (S334: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S336.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an output screen resolution setting command transmission process (S335). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the output screen resolution in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and the output screen resolution setting includes output screen number (1 to 4), horizontal resolution (480 to 4060), and vertical. A command of “output screen resolution setting (see CMD: 06H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” for designating the resolution (240 to 1600) is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change processing. Specifically, as an example, when the output screen division setting number is “2”, the output screen resolution setting command is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK twice (two cycles (400 msec)). Output screen number: 1 for the first time, horizontal resolution and vertical resolution corresponding to the output screen number: 1, output screen number for the second time: 2 and horizontal resolution and vertical resolution corresponding to the output screen number: 2 Sent. In the case of the input screen resolution setting command described later, similarly, the input screen resolution setting command is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK a number of times according to the input screen division setting number.

In S336, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the input screen division setting number. When the content of the setting change is the number of input screen division settings (S336: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S337. When the content of the setting change is not the input screen division setting number (S336: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S338.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an input screen division setting number command transmission process (S337). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the input screen division setting number in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and designates 1 or 2 as the input screen division setting number. CMD: 07H shown in the right column)' command is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change processing.

In S338, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the input screen resolution setting. When the content of the setting change is the input screen resolution setting (S338: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S339. If the setting change content is not the input screen resolution setting (S338: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an input screen resolution setting command transmission process (S339). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the input screen resolution in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and as the input screen resolution setting, the input pattern (0, 1) corresponding to the input screen number (1, 2). , A horizontal resolution (480 to 4060) and a vertical resolution (240 to 1600) are transmitted to the scaler board SK with a command of “input screen resolution setting (see CMD: 08H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. .. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change processing. Such a scaler setting changing process is executed when the operator of the gaming machine manufacturing factory performs a menu operation using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T.

[Processing when receiving a scaler status command]
FIG. 80 shows the processing when the scaler status command is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts a value from “D1” of the reception data indicating the status, and based on the value, determines whether the status type is output setting or not (S341). When the status type is output setting (S341: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S342. If the status type is not output setting (S341: No), that is, if it is input setting, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S343.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the output screen resolution data saved after “D2” of the status reception data in the scaler setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S342). As shown in FIG. 54, the output screen resolution data includes output division numbers (1 to 4), output first to fourth screen horizontal resolutions (0 to 4060), and output first to fourth screen vertical resolutions (0 to 1600). Is included. After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S344.

In step S343, the sub CPU 400 saves the input screen resolution data saved after “D2” of the status reception data in the scaler setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41. As shown in FIG. 54, the input screen resolution data includes the input division number (1 or 2), the input first and second screen horizontal resolutions (0 to 4060), and the input first and second screen vertical resolutions (0 to 1600). Be done.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S344). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of the status request to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the processing at the time of receiving the scaler status command.

[Scalar reception confirmation Processing at reception]
FIG. 81 shows the scaler reception confirmation reception processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the scaler setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 is'ON' (S351). When the scaler setting changing flag is'ON' (S351: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S352. When the scaler setting changing flag is not “ON” (S351: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler reception confirmation reception time process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (scaler setting value before the change) from the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S352).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the scaler setting value storage area is an end block (-1 or 0FFFFH is stored) (S353). When the scaler set value storage area is the end block (S353: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S356. When the scaler set value storage area is not the end block (S353: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S354.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler setting change process (S354). This process is as shown in FIG. 79.

Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) of the scaler set value storage area (S355). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler reception confirmation reception time process.

In S356, the sub CPU 400 performs a setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits to the scaler board SK, a command indicating that the scaler set value is “setting completed (see CMD: 02H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “OFF” (S357). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler reception confirmation reception time process.

[Sub LCD control processing]
FIG. 82 shows a sub liquid crystal control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 indicates'sub liquid crystal (see ID: 04H shown in FIG. 53)'. It is determined whether or not (S361). When the transmission source ID indicates “sub liquid crystal” (S361: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S362. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “sub liquid crystal” (S361: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control reception data consistency check process for controlling the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T (S362). In this process, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of '41H' to '45H' indicating the transmission command from the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL shown in FIG. Is checked and the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S364. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S365.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S364). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

In S365, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control reception time process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

[Sub LCD control reception process]
FIG. 83 shows a sub liquid crystal control reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies the reception data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to the sub liquid crystal control reception storage area (S371).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'start parameter request (see CMD: 41H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' (S372). When the received command is “activation parameter request” (S372: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S373. When the received command is not the "activation parameter request" (S372: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S374.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal activation parameter request reception process (S373). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

In S374, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'parameter request (see CMD: 42H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the received command is'parameter request' (S374: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S375. If the received command is not a'parameter request' (S374: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S381.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a request for changing the sub liquid crystal setting value based on the value of the parameter included in the command for receiving the parameter request (see D1:01H shown in the left column of FIG. 55) ( S375). If there is a request for changing the sub liquid crystal setting value (S375: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S376. When there is no request to change the sub liquid crystal setting value (S375: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S379.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “ON” (S376).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (sub liquid crystal set value to be changed) from the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (see FIG. 62) (S377).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the sub liquid crystal setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S378). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

In S379, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a status request from the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL based on the value of the parameter included in the parameter request reception command (see D1:02H shown in the left column of FIG. 55). Determine. If there is a status request (S379: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S380. When there is no status request (S379: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S380). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

In S381, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'status (see CMD:43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the received command is “status” (S381: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S382. When the received command is not'status' (S381: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S383.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal status command reception process (S382). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 86. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

In S383, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'receipt confirmation (see CMD:44H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the received command is'acknowledgement' (S383: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S384. When the received command is not'acknowledgement' (S383: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S385.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process (S384). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S385, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'error notification (see CMD:45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the received command is “error notification” (S385: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S386. When the received command is not'error notification' (S385: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal error occurrence process (S386).

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a sound sub liquid crystal error generation output to the speaker group 62 at the same time as notifying the error of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL (sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or touch panel DD19T) by sound, and at the same time. An LED sub liquid crystal error occurrence lighting request is issued to the LED group 61 in order to notify the error by the light emitting mode (S387). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

[Processing when receiving sub-LCD activation parameter request]
FIG. 84 shows a sub liquid crystal activation parameter request reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a startup parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S391). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command of “start parameter request confirmation” to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal startup setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to "ON" (S392). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal activation parameter request reception process.

[Sub LCD setting change processing]
FIG. 85 shows a sub liquid crystal setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change contents of the sub liquid crystal set value received as an argument (S401).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402). When the content of the setting change is the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S403. When the content of the setting change is not the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S404.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting command transmission process (S403). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the sub liquid crystal screen resolution in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and sets a command for setting the sub liquid crystal screen resolution (see CMD: 45H shown in the right column of FIG. 55). To the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

In S404, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal brightness setting. When the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal luminance setting (S404: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S405. If the setting change content is not the sub liquid crystal brightness setting (S404: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal brightness setting command transmission process (S405). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the sub liquid crystal brightness in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 46H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) for setting the sub liquid crystal brightness. It transmits to the liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

[Processing when receiving sub LCD status command]
FIG. 86 shows the processing when the sub liquid crystal status command is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts a value from "D1" of the reception data indicating the status, and based on the value, determines whether the status type is touch input or not (S411). When the status type is touch input (S411: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S412. When the status type is not touch input (S411: No), that is, when the liquid crystal setting is set, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S413.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the touch input data included in the status reception command in the touch panel input storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S412). As shown in FIG. 55, the touch input data includes the input type and the input X and Y coordinates regarding the touch panel DD19T. After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S414.

In S413, the sub CPU 400 stores the liquid crystal setting data included in the status reception command in the sub liquid crystal setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41. As shown in FIG. 55, the liquid crystal setting data includes horizontal resolution (200 to 800) and vertical resolution (200 to 800).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S414). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating completion of status request (see CMD:44H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal status command reception process.

[Sub liquid crystal reception confirmation processing when receiving]
FIG. 87 shows a sub liquid crystal reception confirmation and reception time process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 is'ON' (S421). When the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag is'ON' (S421: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S422. When the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag is not'ON' (S421: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (sub liquid crystal set value to be changed) from the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (see FIG. 62) of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S422).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is an end block (S423). When the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area is the end block (S423: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S426. When the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is not the end block (S423: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S424.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the sub liquid crystal setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S424). This process is as shown in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) of the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (S425). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception processing.

In S426, the sub CPU 400 performs a setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL a command (see CMD: 42H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) indicating the completion of setting of the sub liquid crystal set value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “OFF” (S427). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception processing.

[Projector control processing]
FIG. 88 shows a projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is'projector (see ID: 03H shown in FIG. 53)'. It is determined (S431). When the transmission source ID indicates “projector” (S431: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S432. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “projector” (S431: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector control reception data consistency check processing for controlling the projector device B2 (S432). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433). If there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S434. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S435.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S434). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S435, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector drift correction processing (S436). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

[Processing when receiving projector control]
FIG. 89 shows a projector control reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies the reception data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to the projector control reception storage area (S441).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'start parameter request (CMD: 81H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' (S442). When the received command is “activation parameter request” (S442: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S443. When the received command is not the "activation parameter request" (S442: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S444.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector startup parameter request reception process (S443). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

In S444, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'parameter request (see CMD: 82H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the received command is “parameter request” (S444: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S445. When the received command is not “parameter request” (S444: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S451.

Next, the sub CPU 400 issues a projector setting value change request (see CMD:82H, D1:01H shown in the left column of FIG. 56) based on the value of the parameter included in the command for receiving the parameter request (see FIG. 56). It is determined whether or not there is (S445). If there is a request to change the projector setting value (S445: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S446. If there is no request to change the projector setting value (S445: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S449.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to "ON" (S446).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (the projector setting value to be changed) from the projector setting value storage area (S447).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S448). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 91. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

In step S449, the sub CPU 400 requests the status from the projector control board B23 based on the value of the parameter included in the reception command of the parameter request (see FIG. 56) (see CMD:82H, D1:02H shown in the left column of FIG. 56). It is determined whether or not there is. When there is a status request (S449: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S450. If there is no status request (S449: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S450). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

In S451, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'receipt confirmation (see CMD:83H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the received command is'acknowledgement' (S451: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S452. When the received command is not'acknowledgement' (S451: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S453.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector reception confirmation reception time process (S452). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S453, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'error notification (see CMD:84H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the received command is “error notification” (S453: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S454. When the received command is not “error notification” (S453: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S455.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs processing upon reception of a projector error notification (S454). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

In S455, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a status-related command (see CMD: 85H to 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56). When the received command is a status-related command (S455: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S456. If the received command is not a status-related command (S455: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception time process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a process when the projector status is received (S456). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

[Processing when a projector startup parameter request is received]
FIG. 90 shows a process at the time of receiving a projector activation parameter request by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a startup parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S461). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command of “start parameter request confirmation” to the projector control board B23.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector startup setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to "ON" (S462). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process when the projector activation parameter request is received.

[Projector setting change processing]
FIG. 91 shows a projector setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change content of the projector setting value received as an argument (S471).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) (S472). When the setting change content is the horizontal position offset (S472: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S473. If the content of the setting change is not the horizontal position offset (S472: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S474.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs horizontal position offset command transmission processing (S473). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and a command for setting the horizontal position offset (see the right column in FIG. 56). CMD: 88H)) to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S474, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is the vertical position offset (vertical position A to E offset). When the setting change content is the vertical position offset (S474: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S475. When the setting change content is not the vertical position offset (S474: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S476.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs vertical position offset command transmission processing (S475). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the vertical position offset (vertical position A to E offset) in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and a command for setting the vertical position offset (see the right column in FIG. 56). (See CMD:8AH) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S476, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is the focus offset (focus position offsets A to E). When the setting change content is the focus offset (S476: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S477. If the setting change content is not the focus offset (S476: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S478.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs focus position offset command transmission processing (S477). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sets a command for setting the focus position offsets A to E (CMD shown in the right column of FIG. 56: 8FH)) to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S478, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is focus drift correction (focus drift correction values A to E). When the setting change content is the focus drift correction (S478: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S479. When the setting change content is not the focus drift correction (S478: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S480.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs focus drift correction value command transmission processing (S479). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and sets a command for setting the focus drift correction values A to E (shown in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: 91H) to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S480, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is the LED brightness setting. When the setting change content is the LED brightness setting (S480: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S481. When the setting change content is not the LED brightness setting (S480: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S482.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an LED brightness setting command transmission process (S481). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 85H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the LED brightness to the projector control board. Send to B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S482, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value. When the content of the setting change is the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S482: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S483. When the setting change content is not the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S482: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S484.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission processing (S483). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 86H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value. It is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S484, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is contrast setting. When the content of the setting change is the contrast setting (S484: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S485. When the content of the setting change is not the contrast setting (S484: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S486.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a contrast setting command transmission process (S485). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 8CH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the contrast to the projector control substrate B23. To send. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S486, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is gamma setting. When the content of the setting change is the gamma setting (S486: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S487. When the content of the setting change is not the gamma setting (S486: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S488.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a gamma setting command transmission process (S487). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 8EH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the gamma value to the projector control board B23. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S488, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is white color temperature. When the content of the setting change is the white color temperature (S488: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S489. When the content of the setting change is not the white color temperature (S488: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S490.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a white color temperature command transmission process (S489). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the projector by rewriting the white color temperature in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and issuing a command (see CMD: 87H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the white color temperature. It transmits to the board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S490, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is brightness. When the content of the setting change is the brightness (S490: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S491. If the setting change content is not brightness (S490: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S492.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a brightness command transmission process (S491). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the brightness in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 8CH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the brightness to the projector control board B23. To send. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S492, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a test pattern. When the content of the setting change is the test pattern (S492: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S493. When the setting change content is not the test pattern (S492: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S493). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the test pattern in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 92H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the test pattern to the projector control substrate B23. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing. Such a projector setting change process is executed when a maintenance worker in the game hall or an inspection worker performs various optical adjustments on the projector device B2 before shipping from the factory.

[Processing when receiving the projector reception confirmation]
FIG. 92 shows a projector reception confirmation reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the projector setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 is'ON' (S501). When the projector setting changing flag is'ON' (S501: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S502. When the projector setting changing flag is not “ON” (S501: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector reception confirmation reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (the projector setting value to be changed) from the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S502).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the projector setting value storage area is an end block (S503). When the projector setting value storage area is the end block (S503: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S506. When the projector setting value storage area is not the end block (S503: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S504.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S504). This process is as shown in FIG. 91.

Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) in the projector setting value storage area (S505). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector reception confirmation reception process.

In step S506, the sub CPU 400 performs a setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits to the projector control board B23 a command indicating the completion of setting the projector setting values (see CMD:82H shown in the right column of FIG. 56).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “OFF” (S507). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector reception confirmation reception process.

[Processing when receiving a projector error notification]
FIG. 93 shows a process at the time of receiving a projector error notification by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector error occurrence process in response to the error notification from the projector control board B23 (S511).

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a projector error occurrence display request output to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL in order to display an error of the projector control substrate B23 (projector device B2) on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S512). ).

Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a sound projector error occurrence output request to the speaker group 62 in order to notify by sound of an error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) (S513). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector error notification reception process.

[Processing when projector status is received]
FIG. 94 shows a process when the projector status is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'LED temperature (see CMD:85H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' (S521). .. If the command type is “LED temperature” (S521: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S522. When the command type is not'LED temperature' (S521: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S523.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the LED temperature data included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 85H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41. (S522). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S535.

In S523, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command type acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “FAN rotation speed (see CMD:86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the command type is'FAN rotation speed' (S523: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S524. When the command type is not “FAN rotation speed” (S523: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S525.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the FAN rotation speed data included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 86H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41. Yes (S524). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S535.

In S525, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command type acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “LED brightness (see CMD: 87H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the command type is'LED brightness' (S525: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S526. When the command type is not “LED brightness” (S525: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S527.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the LED brightness data included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 87H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41. (S526). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S535.

In S527, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command type acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “horizontal adjustment value (see CMD: 88H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the command type is the “horizontal adjustment value” (S527: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S528. When the command type is not the “horizontal adjustment value” (S527: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S529.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the horizontal adjustment value included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 88H, D1 to D10 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41. Yes (S528). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S535.

In S529, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'vertical adjustment value (see CMD: 89H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is the “vertical adjustment value” (S529: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S530. When the command type is not the “vertical adjustment value” (S529: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S531.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the vertical adjustment value included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 89H, D1 to D5 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41. Yes (S530). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S535.

In S531, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command type acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'focus adjustment value (see CMD:8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is the'focus adjustment value' (S531: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S532. If the command type is not the'focus adjustment value' (S531: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S533.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus adjustment value included in the acquired command as the status (parameter value, CMD: 8AH, D1 to D10 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41. (S532). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S535.

In S533, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'drift correction temperature (see CMD:8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is “drift correction temperature” (S533: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S534. When the command type is not “drift correction temperature” (S533: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S535.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the drift temperature included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 8BH, D1 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S534). ..

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S535). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating completion of status request (see CMD: 84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector status reception process.

[Projector drift correction processing]
FIG. 95 shows a projector drift correction process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 increments the value of the drift correction monitoring counter of the sub RAM substrate 41 by 1 (S541). The drift correction monitoring counter is an addition counter for measuring the timing for periodically correcting and monitoring the temperature drift related to the optical characteristics of the projector device B2.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, 120 (corresponding to approximately 1 minute) or more as a predetermined value (S542). When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or larger than the predetermined value (S542: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S543. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is less than the predetermined value (S542: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S545.

Next, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the drift correction monitoring counter (S543).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command (see CMD: 83H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) having the projector control board B23 as a transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S544). At this time, the drift correction temperature (see CMD: 83H, D1, *1 shown in the right column of FIG. 56) is designated as a parameter in the status request command. Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. The command set in the process of S544 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'drift correction temperature (see CMD:8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' (S545). If the received command is “drift correction temperature” (S545: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S546. When the received command is not'drift correction temperature' (S545: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and also acquires the position coefficient of the focus position (S546). The position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining the optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E. Such a position coefficient may be transmitted as a status from the projector control board B23, or may be stored in advance in the sub ROM board 42 or the like, or may be a focus position on the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment of FIG. A menu for inputting the position coefficient may be provided so that the position coefficient can be set.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the acquired drift correction temperature and position coefficient (S547). The focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature around the lens.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S547 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S548). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S548: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S548: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S549.

Next, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and stores the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area (S549).

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for requesting a setting change of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S550).

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S551). Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

(Memory map of scaler board SK)
As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, various information is stored in the ROM included in the SDRAM 712 and the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. Note that the various storage areas shown in FIGS. 96 and 97 do not show all the information used in the scaler substrate SK. For example, the control program executed by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK, the work area used by the MCU 700, and the like are omitted in FIGS. 96 and 97.

As shown in FIG. 96, the SDRAM 712 has a first control unit for receiving commands for exchanging commands with the sub control substrate SS, the projector control substrate B23, and the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. -Third reception storage area, first to third transmission storage areas for transmitting a command to each, scaler LSI setting storage area related to multi-output scaler LSI 710, status storage area, flag other storage area, multi-output scaler LSI 710 Also, a scaler LSI use area of the MCU (control LSI) 700 is provided. For example, in the scaler LSI setting storage area, output first to fourth screen horizontal resolutions, output first to fourth screen vertical resolutions, input first and second screen horizontal resolutions, output first and second screen vertical resolutions are stored. It The flags and other storage areas store first to third reception completion flags, first to third EXT reception flags, scaler LSI setting flags, reset request flags, transmission cycle counters, error management areas, and self-diagnosis storage areas. The stored information will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the ROM of the MCU 700, as the scaler LSI initial setting values, the number of output divisions regarding the image division, the number of input divisions, the output first to fourth screen horizontal resolutions, and the output first to fourth screen vertical resolutions. , The input 1st and 2nd screen horizontal resolutions, the input 1st and 2nd screen vertical resolutions are stored, and the serial line setting values are the 1st to 3rd line baud rates, the 1st to 3rd line data lengths, the 1st line data ~ Third line parity, first to third line stop are stored, and a diagnostic value (55AAH) is stored as a value for self-diagnosis. The stored information will be described later.

(Processing of scaler substrate SK)
[Main processing of scaler board by MCU700]
FIG. 98 shows the scaler substrate main processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the MCU 700 performs initialization processing of the scaler substrate SK (S561). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the first reception completion flag in the flag or other storage area of the SDRAM 712 is'ON' (S562). When the first reception completion flag is “ON” (S562: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S563. When the first reception completion flag is not “ON” (S562: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S568.

Next, the MCU 700 acquires the reception data (command) from the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S563).

Next, the MCU 700 sets the first reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas to “OFF” (S564).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates'scaler (see ID: 30H shown in FIG. 53)' (S565). When the transmission destination ID indicates “scaler” (S565: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of S567. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “scaler” (S565: No), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S566.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a sub device bypass transmission process (S566). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a sub-control-scaler reception time process (S567). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a scaler self-diagnosis process (S568). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 700 performs processing during transmission between the sub control and the scaler (S569). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a sub control bypass transmission process (S570). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the reset request flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 is'ON' (S571). When the reset request flag is'ON' (S571: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S572. When the reset request flag is not “ON” (S571: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S573.

Next, the MCU 700 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S572). Waiting for the watchdog timer to reset is a process that waits for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the MCU 700 by performing infinite loop processing without clearing the watchdog timer (or setting it to a predetermined value). When the timer outputs a reset signal to the MCU 700, the MCU 700 is reset, so that the process is restarted from the first step (S561) in the scaler substrate main process (also called “reboot”). The same applies to S700 of the projector control main processing and S871 of the sub liquid crystal control main processing described later.

In S573, the MCU 700 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the MCU 700 waits for a cycle of 2 msec, for example (S574). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S562.

[First serial line reception interrupt process]
FIG. 99 shows the first serial line reception interrupt processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. The first serial line reception interrupt process is a communication interrupt process that fetches received data in response to an external request from the sub control board BB via the first serial line during execution of the scaler board main process. The MCU 700 is configured to execute the second serial line reception interrupt process and the third serial line reception interrupt process as well as the first serial line reception interrupt process. The second serial line reception interrupt process is a communication interrupt process for fetching received data in response to an external request from the projector control board B23 via the second serial line, and the third serial line reception interrupt process is 3 is a communication interrupt process for fetching received data in response to an external request from the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL via the serial line. The second and third serial line reception interrupt processes are substantially the same as the first serial line reception interrupt process except that the lines are different, and therefore the illustration thereof is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 99, the MCU 700 determines whether the received data from the first serial line (sub control board SS) is'STX(02H)' indicating the start of the data (S581). When the received data is'STX' (S581: Yes), the MCU 700 proceeds to the processing of the next S582. When the received data is not'STX' (S581: No), the MCU 700 moves to the process of S583.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the first ETX reception flag and the first reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to “OFF”, and clears the first reception storage area (S582). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

In S583, the MCU 700 saves the reception data from the first serial line (sub control board SS) in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the received data is'ETX(03H)' indicating the end of the data (S584). When the received data is'ETX' (S584: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S585. When the received data is not'ETX' (S584: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S586.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the first ETX reception flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to “ON” (S585). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

In S586, the MCU 700 determines whether the first ETX reception flag in the flag or other storage area of the SDRAM 712 is'ON'. When the first ETX reception flag is “ON” (S586: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S587. When the first ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S586: No), the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a received data sum check process (S587).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S587 is normal (S588). When the sum value is normal (S588: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S590. When the sum value is not normal (S588: No), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S589. The method for calculating the sum value is the same as the content described in the sub device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74) described above.

Next, the MCU 700 discards the data in the first serial line reception storage area (S589). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

In S590, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and other first reception completion flag in the storage area to “ON”. After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

[Scaler initialization processing]
FIG. 100 shows a scaler initialization process performed by the MCU 700 on the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 initializes internal functions (S601).

Next, the MCU 700 initializes the first to third serial lines (S602).

Next, the MCU 700 acquires various initial setting values related to input/output of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 from the ROM (S603).

Next, the MCU 700 performs initial setting regarding input/output of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S604). In this process, the MCU 700 performs initial setting for the DSF(α)821, DSF(β)822 and the select areas A to D801 to 804 of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 based on the initial setting value acquired from the ROM.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the scaler LSI setting flag and the reset request flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to “OFF” (S605). After that, the MCU 700 ends the scaler initialization process.

[Sub-device bypass transmission processing]
FIG. 101 shows a sub-device bypass transmission process by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the received data indicates “projector (30H)” (S611). When the transmission destination ID indicates “projector” (S611: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S612. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “projector” (S611: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S614.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the second transmission storage area (S612).

Next, the MCU 700 performs the second serial line transmission process (S613). In this process, the MCU 700 outputs the data transmitted from the sub control board SS to the projector control board B23 to the second serial line. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub device bypass transmission process.

In S614, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the received data indicates'sub liquid crystal (see ID: 40H shown in FIG. 53)'. When the destination ID indicates'sub liquid crystal' (S614: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S615. When the destination ID does not indicate “sub liquid crystal” (S614: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub device bypass transmission process.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the third transmission storage area (S615).

Next, the MCU 700 performs a third serial line transmission process (S616). In this process, the MCU 700 outputs the data transmitted from the sub control substrate SS to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL to the third serial line. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub device bypass transmission process.

[Processing during reception between sub-control and scaler]
FIG. 102 shows the sub-control-scaler reception time processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, in the MCU 700, the command (CMD) of the reception data (hereinafter, referred to as “acquired reception data” in this processing) acquired from the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 from the sub-control board SS in S563 is'. It is determined whether or not it is a status request (see CMD: 03H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)' (S621). When the command of the acquired received data is “status request” (S621: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S622. When the command of the acquired received data is not “status request” (S621: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S624.

Next, the MCU 700 registers the transmission request of the command indicating the “status” corresponding to the output setting (D1:01H) and the input setting (D1:02H) of the “status request” to the sub control board SS (S622). ).

Next, the MCU 700 stores various parameter values (D1) included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S623). After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-control-scaler reception process.

In S624, the MCU 700 determines whether the command of the acquired received data is'setting complete (see CMD: 02H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is “setting completed” (S624: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S625. When the command of the acquired received data is not “setting completed” (S624: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S626.

Next, the MCU 700 changes the setting of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 with the set value in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S625). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S626, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation (see CMD:01H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. When the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation” (S626: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S627. When the command of the acquired received data is not “start parameter request confirmation” (S626: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S628.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag scaler LSI setting flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to “ON” (S627). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S628, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'output screen division setting number (see CMD:05H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is the “output screen division setting number” (S628: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S629. When the command of the acquired received data is not the “output screen division setting number” (S628: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S630.

Next, the MCU 700 saves the output screen division setting number included in the acquired reception data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S629). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S630, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'output screen resolution setting (see CMD:06H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is “output screen resolution setting” (S630: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S631. When the command of the acquired received data is not “output screen resolution setting” (S630: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S632.

Next, the MCU 700 saves the output screen resolution included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S631). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S632, the MCU 700 determines whether the command of the acquired received data is “input screen division setting number (see CMD:07H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. If the command of the acquired received data is the “input screen division setting number” (S632: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S633. When the command of the acquired received data is not the “input screen division setting number” (S632: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S634.

Next, the MCU 700 saves the input screen division setting number included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S633). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S634, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “input screen resolution setting (see CMD: 08H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. When the command of the acquired received data is “input screen resolution setting” (S634: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S635. When the command of the acquired received data is not “input screen resolution setting” (S634: No), the MCU 700 determines that the command of the acquired received data is “status request completion (see CMD: 04H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. Therefore, the process proceeds to S636.

Next, the MCU 700 saves the input screen resolution included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S635).

Next, the MCU 700 registers a transmission request for a command indicating'receipt confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)' with the sub control board SS (S636). After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-control-scaler reception process.

[Scalar self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 103 shows the scaler self-diagnosis processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 writes, for example, '55AAH' as the diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the SDRAM 712 by the verify check (S641).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnostic value (S642). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S642: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S644. When the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S642: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S643.

Next, the MCU 700 sets "self-diagnosis abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S643).

Next, the MCU 700 reads the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S644).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is normal (S645). When the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is normal (S645: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S647. When the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is not normal (S645: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S646.

Next, the MCU 700 sets "WDT (watchdog timer)-scaler abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S646).

Next, the MCU 700 reads the output setting of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S647).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the output setting data stored in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 and the output setting of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 have the same setting value (S648). When the output setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual output setting have the same setting value (S648: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S650. When the output setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual output setting have different setting values (S648: No), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S649.

Next, the MCU 700 sets "scaler output setting abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S649).

Next, the MCU 700 reads the input setting of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S650).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data related to the input setting stored in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 and the input setting for implementation of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 have the same set value (S651). When the input setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual input setting have the same setting value (S651: Yes), the MCU 700 ends the scaler self-diagnosis process. When the input setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual input setting have different setting values (S651: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S652.

Next, the MCU 700 sets "scaler input setting abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S652). After that, the MCU 700 ends the scaler self-diagnosis process.

[Processing during transmission between sub-control and scaler]
FIG. 104 shows processing during transmission between the sub control and the scaler by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 increments the transmission cycle counter by 1 (S661). The transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of command transmission from the scaler board SK.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the value of the transmission cycle counter is 100 or more as a predetermined value (S662). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or larger than the predetermined value (S662: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S663. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than the predetermined value (S662: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub-control-scaler transmission process. In the present embodiment, since the scaler substrate main process described above is configured to be performed at a cycle of 2 msec, the value of the transmission cycle counter of 100 or more means 2 msec×100=200 msec or more. As a result, the data is transmitted to the sub-control board SS at a cycle of approximately 200 msec, but not limited to this, the predetermined value of the transmission cycle counter may be any value (for example, transmission cycle counter: 50×2 msec). =100 msec cycle).

Next, the MCU 700 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S663).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag or other scaler LSI setting flag in the storage area of the SDRAM 712 is'OFF' (S664). When the scaler LSI setting flag is'OFF' (S664: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S665. When the scaler LSI setting flag is not “OFF” (S664: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S666.

Next, the MCU 700 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating “activation parameter request (see CMD: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” for the sub control board SS (S665). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the first serial line transmission processing of S676 described later. After the processing of S665, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S666, the MCU 700 determines whether error data exists in the error management area of the SDRAM 712. When the error data exists in the error management area (S666: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S667. When no error data exists in the error management area (S666: No), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of S669.

Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating “error notification (see CMD:05H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” as transmission data for the sub control board SS (S667). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the first serial line transmission processing of S676 described later.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the reset request flag in the storage area to “ON” (S668). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S669, the MCU 700 determines whether or not there is a request to send a command indicating'receipt confirmation (CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)' to the sub control board SS. When there is a request to send a command indicating'receipt confirmation' (S669: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S670. If there is no request to send a command indicating'receipt confirmation' (S669: No), the MCU 700 moves to the process of S671.

Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating'receipt confirmation' for the sub control board SS as transmission data (S670). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the first serial line transmission processing of S676 described later. After the processing of S670, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S671, the MCU 700 determines whether or not there is a request to send a command indicating'status (see CMD: 03H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)' to the sub control board SS. When there is a request to send a command indicating'status' (S671: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S672. When there is no request to send a command indicating'status' (S671: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S675.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the data in the status storage area of the SDRAM 712 is data related to output setting (S672). When the data in the status storage area is data related to the output setting (D1:01H) (S672: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S673. When the data in the status storage area is not the data related to the output setting, that is, the data related to the input setting (D1:02H) (S672: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S674.

Next, the MCU 700 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating “status” related to output setting for the sub control board SS (S673). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the first serial line transmission processing of S676 described later. After the processing of S673, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S674, the MCU 700 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating “status” related to the input setting with respect to the sub control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the first serial line transmission processing of S676 described later. After the processing of S674, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S675, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating “parameter request” for the sub control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the next first serial line transmission processing of S676.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a first serial line transmission process (S676). By this transmission processing, various commands are transmitted from the scaler substrate SK to the sub control substrate SS. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-control-scaler transmission process.

[Sub-control bypass transmission processing]
FIG. 105 shows a sub-control bypass transmission process by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the second reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 is'ON' (S681). When the second reception completion flag is “ON” (S681: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the next processing of S682. When the second reception completion flag is not'ON' (S681: No), the MCU 700 moves to the process of S684.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the transmission destination ID of the data stored in the second reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 indicates'sub-control' (S682). When the destination ID indicates'sub-control' (S682: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S683. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate'sub-control' (S682: No), the MCU 700 moves to the process of S684.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken in the second reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the first transmission storage area (S683). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S687.

In S684, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the third reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 is'ON' (S684). When the third reception completion flag is “ON” (S684: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S685. When the third reception completion flag is not “ON” (S684: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub control bypass transmission process.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the transmission destination ID of the data stored in the third reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 indicates'sub-control' (S685). When the destination ID indicates'sub-control' (S685: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S686. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “sub-control” (S685: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub-control bypass transmission process.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken in the third reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the first transmission storage area (S686).

Next, the MCU 700 performs a first serial line transmission process (S687). By this transmission processing, various data are transmitted from the sub device (projector control board B23, sub liquid crystal I/F board SL) to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub control bypass transmission process.

(Memory map of projector control board B23)
As shown in FIG. 106, various kinds of information are stored in the DRAM included in the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, the EEPROM 231 and the ROM included in the control LSI 230.

As shown in FIG. 106, the DRAM of the control LSI 230 is provided with a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, various flags & work areas, a general set value storage area, a setting data storage area, and various work areas not shown. .. For example, various flags and work areas include a reception completion flag, an EXT reception flag, a start setting flag, a horizontal position setting flag, a vertical position setting flag, a focus position setting flag, an error management area, a transmission cycle counter, a status storage area, and a reset. The request flag and the self-diagnosis storage area are stored. In the general setting value storage area, horizontal position A to E offset, vertical position A to E offset, focus position offset A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color The temperature setting, brightness setting, gamma setting, and contrast setting are stored. The setting data storage area stores horizontal position adjustment values, vertical position adjustment values, focus position adjustment values, LED brightness settings, keystone distortion correction values, white color temperature settings, brightness settings, gamma settings, and contrast settings. .. The stored information will be described later.

Further, the EEPROM 231 is provided with a basic setting value storage area. The horizontal position AE adjustment values, the vertical position AE adjustment values, and the focus position AE adjustment values are stored in the basic set value storage area. The ROM of the control LSI 230 stores an LED temperature table, a control program for the projector control board B23 (not shown), and various constant values. The stored information will be described later.

(Processing of projector control board B23)
[Main Processing of Projector Control by Control LSI 230]
FIG. 107 shows the projector control main processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 230 performs a projector initialization process (S691). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not various flags of the DRAM & the reception completion flag in the work area are “ON” (S692). When the reception completion flag is'ON' (S692: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S693. When the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S692: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S697.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S693).

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the reception completion flag in the work area to “OFF” (S694).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired received data indicates'projector (see ID: 30H shown in FIG. 53)' (S695). When the transmission destination ID indicates'projector' (S695: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S696. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “projector” (S695: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S697.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector reception process (S696). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector self-diagnosis process (S697). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 113.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector transmission process (S698). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether the various flags of the DRAM & the reset request flag in the work area are “ON” (S699). When the reset request flag is “ON” (S699: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S700. When the reset request flag is not “ON” (S699: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S701.

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S700). Waiting for the watchdog timer to reset is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing the watchdog timer (or setting a predetermined value) and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 230. When the timer outputs the reset signal to the control LSI 230, the control LSI 230 is reset, and the process is restarted from the first step (S691) in the projector control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

In step S701, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a cycle of 4 msec, for example (S702). After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S692.

[Projector serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 108 shows a projector serial line reception interrupt process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. This process is a communication interrupt process for fetching received data in response to an external request via the second serial line during execution of the projector control main process.

As shown in FIG. 108, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the received data from the second serial line is'STX(02H)' indicating the start of the data (S711). When the received data is'STX' (S711: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S712. When the received data is not'STX' (S711: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S713.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the work area to "OFF", and clears the reception storage area (S712). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

In step S713, the control LSI 230 saves the reception data from the second serial line in the reception storage area of the DRAM.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the received data is'ETX' indicating the end of the data (S714). When the received data is'ETX' (S714: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S715. When the received data is not'ETX' (S714: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S716.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the ETX reception flag in the work area to "ON" (S715). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

In S716, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM & the ETX reception flag in the work area are'ON'. When the ETX reception flag is'ON' (S716: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S717. If the ETX reception flag is not "ON" (S716: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a received data sum check process (S717).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S717 is normal (S718). If the sum value is normal (S718: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S720. If the sum value is not normal (S718: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S719. The method for calculating the sum value is the same as the content described in the sub device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74) described above.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the reception storage area of the DRAM (S719). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

In S720, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the reception completion flag in the work area to “ON”. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

[Projector initialization process]
FIG. 109 shows a projector initialization process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 initializes internal functions (S721).

Next, the control LSI 230 initializes the second serial line (S722).

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the horizontal position A adjustment value, the vertical position A adjustment value, and other common settings from the EEPROM 231 (S723).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the setting control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the data acquired in S723 (S724).

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the focus adjustment value A (focus on the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D) from the EEPROM 231 (S725).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs electric focus control processing of the focus mechanism 242 based on the data acquired in S725 (S726). Specifically, according to the electric focus control process, a motor drive signal (excitation signal) to the focus motor 242C is output, and the focus is adjusted to the focus position. The same applies to the processing of S755 described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 initializes various flags and work areas of the DRAM (S727). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector initialization process.

[Processing during reception between sub-control and projector]
FIG. 110 shows sub-control-projector reception processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether the command (CMD) of the received data acquired from the second serial line is “status request” (S731). When the command of the received data (hereinafter referred to as “acquired received data” in this process) acquired from the reception storage area of the DRAM in S693 is “status request” (S731: Yes), the control LSI 230 determines that Then, the process proceeds to S732. When the command of the acquired received data is not “status request” (S731: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S734.

Next, the control LSI 230 registers a command transmission request corresponding to the status (CMD: 85H to 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in response to the'status request' of the sub control board SS (S732).

Next, the control LSI 230 saves various parameter values (see CMD: 83H, D1, *1 shown in the right column of FIG. 56) included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the DRAM (S733). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector reception time process.

In S734, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “setting completed (see CMD:82H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)”. When the command of the acquired received data is “setting completed” (S734: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S735. When the command of the acquired received data is not “setting completed” (S734: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S736.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector internal setting change process (S735). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S742.

In S736, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 81H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)”. If the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation” (S736: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S737. When the command of the acquired received data is not “start parameter request confirmation” (S736: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S738.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the activation flag in the storage area, such as the flag of the DRAM, to "ON" (S737). After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S742.

In S738, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is a setting-related command (CMD: 85H to 91H shown in the right column of FIG. 56). When the command of the acquired received data is a setting-related command (S738: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S739. When the command of the acquired received data is not a setting-related command (S738: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S740.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs projector setting value storage processing (S739). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 112. After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S742.

In S740, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'CMD: 92H shown in the right column of the test pattern diagram 56)'. When the command of the acquired received data is the'test pattern' (S740: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S741. When the command of the acquired received data is not the'test pattern' (S740: No), the control LSI 230 determines that the command of the acquired received data is'status request complete (see CMD:84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)'. , S742.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a test pattern display process (S741). According to this process, a test pattern for an operator to confirm the adjustment condition when performing optical adjustment of the projector device B2 is displayed as a projected image by the projector device B2. When displaying the test pattern, the simple test pattern is displayed on the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 as a virtual image by simulation. The display mode of this simple test pattern will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

Next, the control LSI 230 registers the transmission request of the command indicating "receipt confirmation" (S742). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector reception time process.

[Projector internal setting change process]
FIG. 111 shows a projector internal setting change process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not various flags of the DRAM & the start setting flag in the work area are “ON” (S751). When the activation setting flag is'ON' (S751: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the next processing of S752. When the activation setting flag is not'ON' (S751: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S757.

Next, the control LSI 230 reads the horizontal position A adjustment value, the vertical position A adjustment value, the LED brightness setting value, the trapezoidal distortion correction value, the white from the basic setting value storage area of the EEPROM 231 and the general setting value storage area of the DRAM. The color temperature setting value, the brightness setting value, the gamma setting value, and the contrast setting value are acquired (S752).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a setting change control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the data acquired in S752 (S753).

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value of the focus position A adjustment value+focus position offset A as the focus position control data value (S754).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs electric focus control processing of the focus mechanism 242 based on the control data value acquired in S754 (S755).

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & all setting flags in the work area to "OFF" (S756). Then, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

In S757, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of position (A to E) is set in the various flags of the DRAM & the horizontal position setting flag in the work area. When the position type is set in the horizontal position setting flag (S757: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S758. When the position type is not set in the horizontal position setting flag (S757: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S760.

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is the horizontal position (change) adjustment value+the horizontal position (change) offset as the control data value indicating the horizontal position of the image projection (S758). Note that (change) corresponds to the position after the change of the horizontal position adjustment values A to E and the horizontal position offsets A to E. For example, if the change is (B), the horizontal position control data value is the horizontal position B adjustment value+the horizontal position B offset.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears various flags of the DRAM & horizontal position setting flags in the work area (S759). After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S763.

In step S760, the control LSI 230 determines whether the type of position (A to E) is set in the various flags of the DRAM & the vertical position setting flag in the work area. If the type of position is set in the vertical position setting flag (S760: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S761. When the position type is not set in the vertical position setting flag (S760: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S7640.

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is a vertical position (change) adjustment value+vertical position (change) offset as a control data value indicating the vertical position of image projection (S761). Note that (change) corresponds to the position after the change of the vertical position adjustment values A to E and the vertical position offsets A to E.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears various flags of the DRAM & vertical position setting flags in the work area (S762).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the setting change control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the control data value acquired in S758 or S761 (S763). Then, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

In step S764, the control LSI 230 determines whether the type of position (A to E) is set in the various flags of the DRAM & the focus position setting flag in the work area. When the type of position is set in the focus position setting flag (S764: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of next S765. When the position type is not set in the focus position setting flag (S764: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a focus position (change) adjustment value+focus position offset (change)+focus drift correction (change) as a focus position control data value (S765). Note that (change) corresponds to the position after the change of the focus adjustment values A to E and the focus position offsets A to E.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears various flags of the DRAM & focus position setting flags in the work area (S766).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the control data value acquired in S765, similarly to S755 (S767). Then, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

[Projector setting value storage processing]
FIG. 112 shows the projector setting value storage processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 performs the setting range determination processing based on the data of the setting value of the reception data acquired from the reception storage area in S693 (S771). In this setting range determination processing, it is determined whether the value is within the range described in the parameter column of CMD: 85H to 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56, and the determination result is returned as a return value.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines from the return value of the determination result whether or not the acquired setting value data is valid data (S772). When the acquired data of the setting value is valid data (S772: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S773. When the acquired setting value data is not valid data (S772: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage process.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired set value is the type (basic set value, CMD: 89H, 8B, 90H shown in the right column of FIG. 56, and the EEPROM shown in FIG. 106) to be stored in the EEPROM 231. Yes (S773). When the acquired setting value is the type to be stored in the EEPROM 231 (S773: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S774. The acquired setting value is not the type to be stored in the EEPROM 231, that is, the general setting value to be stored in the DRAM (CMD: 85H to 88H, 8AH, 8CH to 8FH, 91H shown in the right column of FIG. 56 and the DRAM shown in FIG. 106. ) Or the like (S773: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S776.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the acquired data is'adjustment PC (ID: 05H shown in FIG. 53)' (S774). When the transmission source ID is “adjustment PC” (S774: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S775. When the transmission source ID is not “adjustment PC” (S774: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage process.

Next, the control LSI 230 saves the acquired setting value in the designated position of the basic setting value storage area of the EEPROM 231 (see the EEPROM shown in FIG. 106) (S775). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing. Accordingly, the basic setting items related to the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be changed on the EEPROM 231 according to the operation of the adjustment PC 1000.

In S776, the control LSI 230 saves the acquired setting value in the specified position of the general setting value storage area of the DRAM (see DRAM shown in FIG. 106). As a result, the general setting items relating to the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be changed on the DRAM not only by the operation of the adjustment PC 1000 but also by the operation using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or the touch panel DD19T.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of the installation value is the horizontal position offset (S777). When the type of the installation value is the horizontal position offset (S777: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S778. When the type of the installation value is not the horizontal position offset (S777: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S779.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the types of positions (A to E) in the various flags of the DRAM & the horizontal position setting flag in the work area (S778). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

In S779, the control LSI 230 determines whether the type of the set value is the vertical position offset. When the type of the installation value is the vertical position offset (S779: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S780. When the type of the installation value is not the vertical position offset (S779: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S781.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the types of positions (A to E) in various flags of the DRAM & vertical position setting flags in the work area (S780). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

In step S781, the control LSI 230 determines whether the type of the set value is the focus position offset. When the type of the set value is the focus position offset (S781: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S782. When the type of the installation value is not the focus position offset (S781: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage process.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the type of position (A to E) in the various flags of the DRAM & the focus position setting flag in the work area (S782). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

[Projector self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 113 shows projector self-diagnosis processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 writes, for example, "55AAH" as the diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verify check (S791).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value read from the self-diagnosis storage area (load value) matches the diagnosis value correctly (S792). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S792: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S794. When the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S792: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S793.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets “self-diagnosis abnormality (see projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57)” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S793).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs an LED temperature diagnosis process (S794). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor B25.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S795). When the acquired LED temperature is normal (S795: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S797. When the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S795: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S796.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "LED temperature abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S796). Specifically, the temperature sensor B25 detects temperatures near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and near the lens unit B21. The control LSI 230 measures the respective temperatures through the temperature sensor B25, and when the conditions in the LED temperature abnormality condition column of the projector control board error information shown in FIG. Set to area. For example, as the LED (G) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240G, when the temperature near the LED light source 240G detected by the temperature sensor B25 is 105° C. or higher and lower than 110° C., a warning (01B (B means Bit) )) is set, and if it is 110° C. or higher, shutdown (11B) is set.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs FAN rotation diagnosis processing (S797). In this processing, the control LSI 230 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signals from the fans 244A, 244B, 245.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S798). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S798: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S800. When the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S798: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S799.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "FAN rotation abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S799). Specifically, similar to the LED temperature abnormality described above, the FAN rotation abnormality is set according to the conditions of the FAN1 to 4 rotation abnormality of the projector control board error information shown in FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector power source diagnosis process (S800). In this process, the control LSI 230 detects the operating voltage supplied to the projector device B2.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S801). When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S801: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S803. When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is lower than the specified voltage (S801: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S802.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "voltage abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S802). Specifically, similar to the LED temperature abnormality described above, the voltage abnormality is set according to the condition of the voltage abnormality of the projector control board error information shown in FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a DLP operation diagnosis process (S803). In this process, the control LSI 230 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 232.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S804). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S804: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S806. When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is not normal (S804: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S805.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "DLP abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S805). Specifically, similar to the above-mentioned LED temperature abnormality, the DLP abnormality is set according to the condition of WDT-DLP in the projector control board error information shown in FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not data indicating'LED temperature abnormality' (forced shutdown),'FAN rotation abnormality', or'voltage abnormality' is set in the error management area (S806). .. When data indicating any of the above abnormalities is set in the error management area (S806: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S307. If none of the data indicating the abnormality is set in the error management area (S806: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process.

Next, the control LSI 230 issues a rotation stop command to the FAN1 to 3 (fans 244A, 244B, 245) or DLP control circuit 232 and LEDs (R, G, B) (LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba). And issues a drive stop command (S807). As a result, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process. In the present embodiment, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped when data indicating “LED temperature abnormality”, “FAN rotation abnormality”, or “voltage abnormality” is set in the error management area. The power must be turned off for restoration, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the projector device B2 may be restarted when the abnormality that has occurred is recovered while the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped.

[Processing during transmission between sub-control and projector]
FIG. 114 shows sub-control-projector transmission processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 increments the transmission cycle counter by 1 (S811). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting a command from the projector control board B23.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 125 (4 msec×125=500 msec) or more as a predetermined value (S812). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (500 msec or more has elapsed from the previous transmission) (S812: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S813. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than the predetermined value (S812: No), the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector transmission process.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S813).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM & the projector setting flag in the work area are'OFF' (S814). When the projector setting flag is'OFF' (S814: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S815. When the projector setting flag is not “OFF” (S814: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S816.

Next, the control LSI 230 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating “activation parameter request” for the sub control board SS (S815). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the second serial line transmission processing of S825 described later. After the processing of S815, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S825.

In S816, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the DRAM. When the error data exists in the error management area (S816: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S817. When there is no error data in the error management area (S816: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S820.

Next, the control LSI 230 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating'error notification (CMD: 84H shown in the left column of FIG. 56, and see FIG. 57)' for the sub-control board SS (S817). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the second serial line transmission processing of S825 described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the error data in the error management area is data indicating self-diagnosis abnormality or DLP abnormality (S818). When the error data is data indicating the self-diagnosis abnormality or the DLP abnormality (S818: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S819. When the error data is neither the self-diagnosis abnormality data nor the DLP abnormality data (S818: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S825.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the reset request flag in the work area to "ON" (S819). After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S825.

In S820, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not there is a request to send a command indicating “receipt confirmation (CMD: 83H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” to the sub control board SS. When there is a request to send a command indicating'receipt confirmation' (S6820: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S821. When there is no request to send a command indicating “receipt confirmation” (S820: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S822.

Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating “receipt confirmation” for the sub control board SS as transmission data (S821). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the second serial line transmission processing of S825 described later. After the processing of S821, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S825.

In S822, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not there is a request to send a command corresponding to the status (see the left column CMD: 85H to 8BH in FIG. 56) for the sub control board SS. When there is a request to send a command corresponding to the status (S822: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S823. If there is no request to send the command corresponding to the status (S823: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S824.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs status transmission data creation processing (S823). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 115. After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S825.

In S824, the control LSI 230 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating'parameter request (CMD: 82H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' with respect to the sub control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the next second serial line transmission processing of S825.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a second serial line transmission process (S825). By this transmission processing, various commands are transmitted from the projector control board B23 to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector transmission process.

[Status transmission data creation processing]
FIG. 115 shows a status transmission data creation process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area of the DRAM is the LED temperature (S831). When the parameter of the status storage area is the LED temperature (S831: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S832. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the LED temperature (S831: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S834.

Next, the control LSI 230 inputs data from the temperature sensor B25 of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and generates temperature data (S832).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data by using the temperature data (CMD: 85H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) as a parameter in the'LED temperature (CMD: 85H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command ( S833). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S834, the control LSI 230 determines whether the parameter of the status storage area is the FAN rotation speed. When the parameter of the status storage area is the FAN rotation speed (S834: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S835. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the FAN rotation speed (S834: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S837.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the rotation pulse numbers of FAN1 (intake fan 244A), FAN2 (intake fan 244B), and FAN3 (exhaust fan 245) as rotation pulse data (S835).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the “FAN rotation speed (CMD: 86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” command with the FAN rotation pulse number as a parameter (S836). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In step S837, the control LSI 230 determines whether the parameter of the status storage area is LED brightness. When the parameter of the status storage area is the LED brightness (S837: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S838. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the LED brightness (S837: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S840.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the brightness data of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B from the DLP control circuit 232 (S838).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data by using the LED brightness data acquired from the'LED brightness number (CMD: 87H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command including the LED brightness setting in the status as a parameter (S839). .. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S840, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter in the status storage area is the horizontal adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the horizontal adjustment value (S840: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S841. If the parameter in the status storage area is not the horizontal adjustment value (S840: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S843.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the horizontal position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S841).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data with the values of the horizontal position AE adjustment values as parameters in the'horizontal adjustment value (CMD: 88H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command (S842). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S843, the control LSI 230 determines whether the parameter in the status storage area is the vertical adjustment value. When the parameter in the status storage area is the vertical adjustment value (S843: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S844. When the parameter in the status storage area is not the vertical adjustment value (S843: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S846.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the vertical position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S844).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data by using the values of the vertical position AE adjustment values as parameters in the'vertical direction adjustment value (CMD: 89H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command (S845). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S846, the control LSI 230 determines whether the parameter in the status storage area is the focus adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the focus adjustment value (S846: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S847. When the parameter in the status storage area is not the focus adjustment value (S846: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S849.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the focus position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S847).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the values of the focus position AE adjustment values as parameters in the'focus adjustment value (CMD: 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command (S848). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S849, the control LSI 230 determines whether the parameter in the status storage area is the drift correction temperature. When the parameter of the status storage area is the drift correction temperature (S849: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S850. When the parameter in the status storage area is not the drift correction temperature (S849: No), the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

Next, the control LSI 230 inputs data from the temperature sensor B25 relating to the drift correction temperature and generates drift correction temperature sensor data (S850).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates, as transmission data, a'drift correction temperature (CMD: 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command that includes the drift correction temperature sensor data in the status (S851). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

(Memory map of sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL)
As shown in FIG. 116, various information is stored in the DRAM and ROM included in the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL.

As shown in FIG. 116, the DRAM of the MCU 900 is provided with a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, a flag area, various storage areas, and a sub liquid crystal setting storage area. For example, a reception completion flag, an EXT reception flag, and a sub liquid crystal setting flag are stored in the flag area. A transmission cycle counter, a status storage area, a reset request flag, an error management area, and a self-diagnosis storage area are stored in various storage areas. The sub-liquid crystal setting storage area stores horizontal resolution, vertical resolution, and brightness. The stored information will be described later.

Further, the ROM of the MCU 900 stores horizontal resolution, vertical resolution, and brightness as data values of the liquid crystal initial setting area, and the baud rate (third serial line), data length, parity, as serial line setting values. Stop is stored, and the diagnostic value (55AAH) is stored as a value for self-diagnosis. The stored information will be described later. Although not shown in FIG. 116, the DRAM stores various other work areas used by the MCU 900, and the ROM stores a control program executed by the MCU 900 and constant data.

(Treatment of sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL)
[Sub liquid crystal control main processing by MCU900]
FIG. 117 shows the sub liquid crystal control main processing by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the MCU 900 performs the sub liquid crystal initialization process (S861). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 900 performs touch panel input processing (S862). In this process, the MCU 900 performs a predetermined operation based on an operation signal (a signal corresponding to a touch operation, a flick operation, a pinch operation) from the touch panel DD19T.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM is'ON' (S863). When the reception completion flag is'ON' (S863: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S864. When the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S863: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S868.

Next, the MCU 900 acquires the reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S864).

Next, the MCU 900 sets the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to'OFF' (S865).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates'sub liquid crystal (see ID: 40H shown in FIG. 53)' (S866). When the transmission destination ID indicates “sub liquid crystal” (S866: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S867. When the destination ID does not indicate “sub liquid crystal” (S866: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S868.

Next, the MCU 900 performs processing during reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal (S867). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process (S868). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 900 performs processing during transmission between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal (S869). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the reset request flag in each storage area of the DRAM is'ON' (S870). When the reset request flag is'ON' (S870: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S871. When the reset request flag is not “ON” (S870: No), the MCU 900 moves to the process of S872.

Next, the MCU 900 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S871). Waiting for the watchdog timer to reset is a process for performing an infinite loop process without clearing the watchdog timer (or setting a predetermined value) and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the MCU 900. When the reset signal is output to the MCU 900, the MCU 900 is reset, and the process is restarted from the first step (S861) of the sub liquid crystal control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

In S872, the MCU 900 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the MCU 900 waits for a cycle of 4 msec, for example (S873). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S862.

[Sub LCD serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 118 shows a sub-liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process by the MCU 900 of the sub-liquid crystal I/F board SL. This process is a communication interrupt process for fetching received data in response to an external request via the third serial line during execution of the sub liquid crystal control main process described above.

As shown in FIG. 118, the MCU 900 determines whether the received data from the third serial line is'STX(02H)' indicating the start of the data (S881). When the received data is'STX' (S881: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S882. When the received data is not'STX' (S881: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S883.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to "OFF" and clears the reception storage area (S882). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

In S883, the MCU 900 saves the reception data from the third serial line in the reception storage area of the DRAM.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the received data is'ETX(03H)' indicating the end of the data (S884). When the received data is'ETX' (S884: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S885. When the received data is not'ETX' (S884: No), the MCU 900 moves to the process of S886.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the ETX reception flag in the flag area of the DRAM to "ON" (S885). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

In S886, the MCU 900 determines whether the ETX reception flag in the flag area of the DRAM is'ON'. When the ETX reception flag is “ON” (S886: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S887. When the ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S886: No), the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a received data sum check process (S887).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S887 is normal (S888). When the sum value is normal (S888: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S890. When the sum value is not normal (S888: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S889. The method for calculating the sum value is the same as the content described in the sub device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74) described above.

Next, the MCU 900 clears the reception storage area of the DRAM (S889). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

In S890, the MCU 900 sets the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “ON”. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

[Sub liquid crystal initialization processing]
FIG. 119 shows a sub liquid crystal initialization process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 initializes internal functions (S891).

Next, the MCU 900 initializes the third serial line (S892).

Next, the MCU 900 initializes the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 based on the horizontal resolution, the vertical resolution, and the brightness stored in the ROM (S893).

Next, the MCU 900 initializes the touch panel DD19T (S894).

Next, the MCU 900 sets the sub liquid crystal setting flag and the reset request flag to “OFF” in the flag area and various storage areas of the DRAM (S895). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal initialization process.

[Processing during reception between sub control and sub liquid crystal]
FIG. 120 shows processing during reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 determines whether the command of the received data acquired from the third serial line in S864 is'status request (see CMD:43H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)' (S901). When the command of the acquired received data is “status request” (S901: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S902. When the command of the acquired received data is not “status request” (S901: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S904.

Next, the MCU 900 registers a command transmission request indicating "status" in response to the "status request" (S902).

Next, the MCU 900 saves various parameter values included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the DRAM (S903). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub-control-sub liquid crystal reception time process.

In S904, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'setting complete (see CMD:42H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)'. When the command of the acquired received data is “setting completed” (S904: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S905. When the command of the acquired received data is not “setting completed” (S904: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S906.

Next, the MCU 900 changes the setting of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL with the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S905). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S912.

In S906, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation (see CMD:41H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)”. When the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation” (S906: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S907. If the command of the acquired received data is not “start parameter request confirmation” (S906: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S908.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the sub liquid crystal setting flag in the flag area of the DRAM to "ON" (S907). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S912.

In S908, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is the'sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (see CMD:45H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)' command. When the command of the acquired received data is the “sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting” command (S908: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S909. When the command of the acquired received data is not the'sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting' command (S908: No), the MCU 900 moves to the process of S910.

Next, the MCU 900 stores the set value of the sub liquid crystal screen resolution of the received data acquired in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S909). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S912.

In S910, the MCU 900 determines whether the command of the acquired received data is'sub liquid crystal brightness setting (see CMD:46H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)'. When the command of the acquired received data is “sub liquid crystal brightness setting” (S910: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S911. If the command of the acquired reception data is not “sub liquid crystal brightness setting” (S910: No), the command of the acquired reception data is “status request completion (see CMD:44H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)”. Shifts to the processing of S912.

Next, the MCU 900 stores the brightness setting value of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S911). According to such a process, when the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 is performed, the resolution and the brightness thereof are arbitrarily changed so that the operator who visually recognizes the simple test pattern through the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can easily see it. be able to.

Next, the MCU 900 registers a transmission request for a command indicating "receipt confirmation" (S912). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub-control-sub liquid crystal reception time process.

[Sub LCD self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 121 shows a sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 writes, for example, '55AAH' as the diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verify check (S921).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S922). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S922: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S924. When the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S922: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S923.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "self-diagnosis abnormality (see the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S923).

Next, the MCU 900 reads the status (operating state) of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL (S924).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the status of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL is normal (S925). When the status of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL is normal (S925: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S927. When the status of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL is not normal (S925: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S926.

Next, the MCU 900 sets'WDT-sub liquid crystal abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I/F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)' as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S926).

Next, the MCU 900 reads actual data (actual resolution, brightness, etc.) relating to the sub liquid crystal image setting (S927).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the set value in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data regarding the sub liquid crystal image setting have the same set value (S928). When the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data related to the sub liquid crystal image setting are the same set value (S928: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S930. If the set value in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data regarding the sub liquid crystal image setting do not match (S928: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the processing of the next S929.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "sub liquid crystal screen setting abnormality (see the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S929).

Next, the MCU 900 reads temperature information (sensor temperature) based on a signal from a temperature sensor (not shown) incorporated in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S930).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the sensor temperature is 100° C. or higher (S931). When the sensor temperature is 100° C. or higher (S931: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S931. When the sensor temperature is lower than 100° C. (S931: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S933.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "sub liquid crystal temperature abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I/F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S932).

Next, the MCU 900 performs the operation state determination process of the touch panel DD19T (S933).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the ON state (touch, flick, or pinch state) of the touch panel DD19T is detected for 30 minutes or more (S934). When the ON state of the touch panel DD19T is detected for 30 minutes or more (S934: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S935. When it is not detected for 30 minutes or more (S934: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S936.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "touch panel input abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I/F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S935).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the status, the set value, or the data indicating “temperature abnormality” is set in the error management area (S936). If any of the above data is set in the error management area (S936: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S937. When none of the above data is set in the error management area (S936: No), the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis processing.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub liquid crystal operation stop process (S937). As a result, the operations of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T are stopped. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process.

[Sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission processing]
FIG. 122 shows a sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process by the MCU 900 of the sub-liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 increments the transmission cycle counter by 1 (S941). The transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting a command from the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 50 (200 msec) or more as a predetermined value (S942). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or larger than the predetermined value (S942: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S943. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than the predetermined value (S942: No), the MCU 900 ends the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process.

Next, the MCU 900 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S943).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the DRAM (S944). When the error data exists in the error management area (S944: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S945. When there is no error data in the error management area (S944: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S947.

Next, the MCU 900 sends an “error notification (see CMD: 45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” command to the sub control board SS as an error management area (CMD: 45H, D1: error information shown in the left column of FIG. 55). (Reference) is added and transmission data is created (S945). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the third serial line transmission processing of S956 described later.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the reset request flags in various storage areas of the DRAM to "ON" (S946). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S947, the MCU 900 determines whether the sub liquid crystal setting flag in the flag area of the DRAM is'OFF'. When the sub liquid crystal setting flag is “OFF” (S947: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the next processing of S948. When the sub liquid crystal setting flag is not “OFF” (S947: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S949.

Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of the'startup parameter request (CMD: 41H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' command for the sub control board SS (S948). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the third serial line transmission processing of S956 described later. After the processing of S948, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S949, the MCU 900 determines whether or not there is a request to send a'reception confirmation' command to the sub control board SS. If there is a request to send the'receipt confirmation' command (S949: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S950. When there is no request to send the'receipt confirmation' command (S949: No), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of S951.

Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of the'receipt confirmation (CMD: 44H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' command for the sub control board SS (S950). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the third serial line transmission processing of S956 described later. After the processing of S950, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S951, the MCU 900 determines whether or not there is a request to send the'status' command to the sub control board SS. When there is a request to send the'status' command (S951: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S952. When there is no request for transmission of the'status' command (S951: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S955.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the data type of the status storage area of the DRAM is related to touch input (S952). When the data type of the status storage area is related to touch input (S952: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S953. When the data type of the status storage area is not related to touch input, that is, related to liquid crystal setting (S952: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S954.

Next, the MCU 900 adds the data of the touch panel input area to the'status (see CMD:43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' command related to the touch input on the sub control board SS to create transmission data (S953). ). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the third serial line transmission processing of S956 described later. After the processing of S953, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In step S954, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a command indicating'status (see CMD:43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' relating to the liquid crystal setting on the sub control substrate SS. This transmission data is stored in the third transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the third serial line transmission processing of S956 described later. After the processing of S954, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S955, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a command indicating'parameter request (CMD: 42H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' with respect to the sub control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the third transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the next third serial line transmission processing of S956.

Next, the MCU 900 performs the third serial line transmission process (S956). By this transmission processing, various commands are transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL to the sub control substrate SS via the scaler substrate SK. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process.

(Optical adjustment of projector device B2)
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a test pattern projected when the projector device B2 is optically adjusted. A person in charge of factory inspection (also called a person in charge of quality assurance) starts application software for optical adjustment on the adjustment PC 1000 and performs a predetermined operation in accordance with a menu of the software, whereby the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1 are operated. Alternatively, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be operated to display the test pattern TP as shown in FIG. 123 on each projection surface. FIG. 123 shows, as an example, a state in which the test pattern TP is displayed on the reflecting portion D1 of the fixed screen mechanism D. The factory inspection operator can observe such a display mode of the test pattern TP from the upper display window UD1 of the gaming machine 1.

The test pattern TP is, for example, a pattern of SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) color bars sprites arranged in a circle and small circular patterns arranged at four corners on a background crosshatch pattern. Is.

Specifically, the factory inspector operates one of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 so as to be a projection target, and each time the projection target is switched, While observing the display mode of the test pattern TP, the projector device B2 can be adjusted so that the display mode is appropriate. As a result, for the projector device B2, the horizontal position adjustment value, the vertical direction position adjustment value, the focus position adjustment value, the LED brightness setting, the keystone distortion correction value, the white color temperature setting, the brightness setting, the contrast setting, the gamma setting, and the test. Optical adjustment can be performed on each item such as a pattern, a horizontal position offset, a vertical position offset, a focus position offset, and the like.

In the present embodiment, during adjustment work such as before assembling the gaming machine, for example, the identification symbols'A' to'C' are assigned to the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1, respectively. The horizontal position A to C adjustment value, the vertical position A to C adjustment value, and the focus position A to C adjustment value that are different for each projection target are set in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 using these identification symbols. Other adjustment items (LED brightness setting, keystone distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, test pattern, horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset) After assembled, it is set in the SRAM 401 of the sub control board SS. Note that the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, and the focus position offset can be adjusted by a maintenance worker at a site such as a game arcade by adjusting the offset values that have been adjusted at the factory.

On the other hand, FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a test pattern TP' and the like displayed on the screen (touch panel DD19T) of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 during optical adjustment of the projector device B2 in the field such as a game arcade. After the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall or the like, the maintenance operator can perform a predetermined operation to display the test pattern TP′ or the like on the touch panel DD19T which is the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. .. The maintenance worker can appropriately perform the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 individually by using such a test pattern TP'.

The test pattern TP' displayed on the touch panel DD19T is different from the test pattern TP directly displayed on the projection target, and is displayed as a virtual image by simulation as an operation target that can be intuitively deformed. In addition, on the touch panel DD19T, buttons T1 and T2 for changing the setting of horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and focus drift correction for each projection target are displayed, as well as keystone distortion correction and LED brightness. , A button T3 and an indicator T4 for changing the setting of the white color temperature, brightness, contrast and gamma value are displayed, and a ten key T5 for inputting various numerical values is also displayed.

Specifically, the maintenance worker displays a test pattern TP′ or the like on the touch panel DD19T by performing a predetermined operation, and any one of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 projects. Operate as targeted. After that, the maintenance operator selects one of the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction by operating the buttons T1 and T2, and directly touches the test pattern TP′ with the touch panel operation. Adjustment can be performed while changing the display mode so that the display mode becomes appropriate. That is, in the test pattern TP', the display position changes vertically and horizontally or the image quality changes according to the operation of the maintenance operator. As a result, with respect to the projector device B2, it is possible to change the setting of the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction for each different projection target. At this time, the maintenance operator can also observe the actual test pattern TP because the test pattern TP is simultaneously projected from the projector device B2 onto the national screen mechanism D. The horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and focus drift correction are set in the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 of the sub control board SS and the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41.

Further, the maintenance operator operates the buttons T3, the ten-key pad T5, etc. while observing the test pattern TP' together with the actual test pattern TP, thereby performing trapezoidal distortion correction, LED brightness, white color temperature, brightness, contrast, gamma value. It is possible to change the settings for each item by directly inputting numerical values. At this time, the test pattern TP' changes its overall shape or color tone according to the operation of the maintenance operator. The values of the respective items such as the trapezoidal distortion correction, the LED brightness, the white color temperature, the brightness, the contrast, and the gamma value which have been changed in this way are stored in the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 of the sub control board SS and the sub RAM board 41. Is set in the projector setting value storage area.

Next, a modified example of the present invention will be described. The same or similar components as those of the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

(Cooling structure of projector device)
FIG. 125 shows a first modification of the projector device. The projector device X shown in the figure has a bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22. In the interior partitioned by the bottom plate X21 and the cover case X22, similarly to the above-described one, a lens unit B21 (partially not shown) including the projection lens 210, LED light sources (240R, 240G, 240B) and DMD ( 241) and the like are provided, and an exhaust fan 245, heat radiation plates 2430 and 2431, and a heat sink 243Xa are further provided. A heat sink 243Xc is externally attached to the outside of the cover case X22 so as to expose the whole. An opening X22B for guiding the irradiation light from the projection lens 210 to the outside is provided on one surface (front surface in FIG. 125) of the cover case X22. The projector device X of the first modification is directly attached to the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G, and is provided so as to directly guide the irradiation light to the projection target without passing through a mirror.

An LED light source (240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba) and a DMD substrate (241a) (not shown) are provided in contact with one surface (lower surface in FIG. 125) of the heat dissipation plate 2430. Another heat radiating plate 2431 is arranged on the other surface (upper surface in FIG. 125) of the heat radiating plate 2430 so as to overlap with each other, and the two heat radiating plates 2430 and 2431 are surface-attached by screws. A heat-conducting sheet (or a heat-conducting gel) is attached to the surface where the heat radiating plates 2430 and 2431 are in contact with each other, and the heat radiating plate 2430 is screwed with a tap for screw fixing (not shown). No). A mounting hole for screwing with a screw is provided on the upper surface of the heat dissipation plate 2431. Further, by removing the screw of the heat dissipation plate 2431, the heat pipe 243Xd and the heat sink 243Xc can be removed. The heat dissipation plate 2430 is connected so as to transfer the heat generated by the LED light source and the DMD substrate to the heat sink 243Xa via the heat pipe 243Xb. The heat dissipated into the air by the heat sink 243Xa is forcibly discharged by the exhaust fan 245 through the exhaust port X22D provided in the cover case X22.

On the other hand, the heat dissipation plate 2431 is connected so as to transfer heat to the heat sink 243Xc via the heat pipe 243Xd. The heat pipe 243Xd extends from the inside of the cover case X22 to the outside through a hole X22A provided in the cover case X22, and is connected to a heat sink 243Xc provided outside. That is, the heat dissipation plate 2431 is connected so as to receive the heat generated by the LED light source or the DMD substrate from the heat dissipation plate 2430 and further to transfer the heat to the heat sink 243Xc via the heat pipe 243Xd. Thereby, the heat generated in the LED light source or the DMD substrate is transmitted to the heat sink 243Xc located outside the cover case X22 through the heat dissipation plate 2431 and the heat pipe 243Xd, is guided to the outside of the projector apparatus X, and is transmitted by the heat sink 243Xc. It is designed to be exhausted. Even with such an external heat sink 243Xc, it is possible to effectively eliminate a heat pool inside the projector apparatus X and prevent overheating of optical components such as a lens.

FIG. 126 shows a second modification of the projector device. A projector device X′ shown in the figure has a bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22, and a lens unit B21 (partially not shown) including a projection lens 210 therein, as in the first modification described above. And an optical mechanism (not shown) including LED light sources (240R, 240G, 240B) and DMD (241), and an exhaust fan 245, a heat dissipation plate 2430, and heat sinks 243Xa, 243Xc. There is. The heat sink 243Xc is arranged as follows, unlike the one according to the first modification described above.

The heat sink 243Xc is directly bonded to one surface (upper surface in FIG. 126) of the heat dissipation plate 2430, and is provided so that heat can be directly transferred from the heat dissipation plate 2430. Further, the fin portion of the heat sink 243Xc is exposed to the outside through an opening X22C provided in one surface (upper surface in FIG. 126) of the cover case X22. With this arrangement structure of the heat sink 243Xc, the heat generated by the LED light source and the DMD substrate is efficiently transmitted to the fin portion of the heat sink 243Xc located outside the cover case X22 through the heat dissipation plate 2430, and the projector device X is provided. The heat will be exhausted outside. Even with the heat sink 243Xc whose fins are exposed to the outside, it is possible to effectively eliminate the heat accumulation inside the projector apparatus X and prevent overheating of optical components such as lenses.

FIG. 127 shows an arrangement form of a projector device according to the third modification. A detailed structure of the projector device X″ shown in the figure is not shown, but the same structure as the projector device X′ shown in FIG. 126 is used, except that a heat sink exposed to the outside is not provided. That is, in the projector device X″, a heat radiating plate 2430 is provided so as to face the opening X22C of the cover case X22 in place of the heat sink 243Xc described above, and the upper surface of the heat radiating plate 2430 slightly projects from the opening X22C. It is exposed (not shown in FIG. 127). In such a projector device X″, the heat dissipation plate 2430 exposed from the opening X22C of the cover case X22 is connected to the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G via the metal heat conducting member Y, and the upper surface wall G4 is not shown. The upper wall G4 is made of a metal plate member having a high thermal conductivity such as stainless steel. According to such a mounting structure of the projector apparatus X″, the upper surface wall G4 is generated inside the apparatus. Since the heat is efficiently transmitted to the upper surface wall G4 through the heat dissipation plate 2430 and the heat conducting member Y, and the upper surface wall G4 itself functions as a heat dissipation member, it is possible to effectively eliminate the heat accumulation inside the projector device X″. It is possible to prevent overheating of optical components such as lenses.

FIG. 128 shows a circuit configuration of a projector device applied to modified examples after the fourth modified example, which will be described later. Note that the projector device B2 as shown in FIG. 33 is also applied to the modifications after the fourth modification. Therefore, the same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 128, the projector device B2 applied to the modified examples after the fourth modified example has a first temperature sensor B25a, a second temperature sensor B25b, an intake temperature sensor B26a, and an exhaust gas as electrical components. A temperature sensor B26b and a plurality of pulse sensors B27a, B27b, B27c are included. In addition, the projector device B2 supplies electric power to the intake fans 244A (FAN1) and 244B (FAN2), the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga and 240Ba, the DMD board 241a, etc., which are not shown. A power supply circuit B20 is also included.

The first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b have the same functions as the temperature sensor B25 described above. The first temperature sensor B25a is provided so as to detect the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 240R on the LED board 240Ra and output a temperature detection signal to the projector control board B23. The second temperature sensor B25b is provided so as to detect the temperature near the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B in the LED substrate 240Ga and the LED substrate 240Ba and output a temperature detection signal to the projector control substrate B23. As described above, regarding the heat generation characteristics of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B, while the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B tend to be relatively high, the LED light source 240R tends to be relatively low. Specifically, the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b tends to be higher than the temperature detected by the first temperature sensor B25a. It should be noted that only one of the temperature sensors B25a and B25b of this type may be provided according to the specifications. Further, when the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b are not particularly distinguished, they are referred to as the temperature sensor B25.

The intake air temperature sensor B26a is arranged near the intake port of the intake fan 244B (FAN2), detects the temperature of the air supplied from the outside of the projector apparatus B2 to the inside through the intake fan 244B, and controls the projector. It is provided so as to output a temperature detection signal to the substrate B23. The exhaust temperature sensor B26b is arranged near the exhaust port of the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), detects the temperature of the air exhausted from the inside of the projector device B2 to the outside through the exhaust fan 245, and controls the projector. It is provided so as to output a temperature detection signal to the substrate B23. Generally, the temperature detected by the exhaust temperature sensor B26b tends to be higher than the temperature detected by the intake temperature sensor B26a. It should be noted that only one of the temperature sensors B26a and B26b of this type may be provided according to the specifications. The intake air temperature sensor B26a and the exhaust gas temperature sensor B26b may be referred to as ventilation temperature sensors.

The pulse sensor B27a is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 244A (FAN1) to the projector control board B23 as a rotation speed detection signal of FAN1. The pulse sensor B27b is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 244B (FAN2) to the projector control board B23 as a rotation speed detection signal of FAN2. The pulse sensor B27c is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3) to the projector control board B23 as a rotation speed detection signal of FAN3. In the present embodiment, the intake fans 244A, 244B (FAN1, FAN2) are of relatively high rotation type, and the exhaust fans 245 (FAN3) are of relatively low rotation type. As a result, the rotational speed detected via the pulse sensors B27a and B27b corresponding to FAN1 and FAN2 tends to be higher than the rotational speed detected via the pulse sensor B27c corresponding to FAN3. It should be noted that with respect to this kind of pulse sensor 27a, 27b, 27c, only one or any two may be provided depending on the specifications. The pulse sensor may be composed of, for example, a photo interrupter.

Fourth to 23rd modified examples will be described below on the premise of the projector device B2 as described above. It should be noted that each of the following modifications does not necessarily use all of the temperature sensor and the pulse sensor, but can be realized by using only a part of them. Further, with respect to each of the modified examples described below, arbitrary modified examples can be appropriately combined unless there is a special reason that makes it difficult to combine the technical prerequisites.

FIG. 129 shows projector control main processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as processing according to the fourth modification. The processing shown in FIG. 129 is obtained by modifying a part of the processing shown in FIG. 107 described above so that the processing is suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 230 performs a projector initialization process (S1001). This process corresponds to the process in FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM & the reception completion flag in the work area are “ON” (S1002). When the reception completion flag is “ON” (S1002: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the next processing of S1003. When the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S1002: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S107.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S1003).

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the reception completion flag in the work area to “OFF” (S1004).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates “projector” (S1005). When the transmission destination ID indicates'projector' (S1005: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S1006. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “projector” (S1005: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S1007.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector reception time process (S1006). This process corresponds to the process in FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector self-diagnosis process (S1007). This process corresponds to the process in FIG. 113. The projector self-diagnosis process can also be applied as a process as shown in FIG. 130 described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector transmission process (S1008). This process corresponds to the process in FIG. The sub-control-projector transmission process can also be applied as a process shown in FIG. 135 described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not LED temperature abnormality (shutdown), FAN rotation abnormality, FAN temperature abnormality, or voltage abnormality is written in the error management area of the DRAM (S1009). The LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) means an LED temperature abnormality leading to a forced shutdown which will be described later, and using the LED temperature control table shown in FIG. Generated and stored when detected as above temperature. The FAN rotation abnormality means a FAN rotation abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown, and using the FAN temperature rotation speed control table shown in FIG. 134, one of the rotation speeds of FAN1 to Generated/stored when detected. The FAN temperature abnormality is generated and stored when the intake air temperature near FAN2 is detected as a predetermined temperature or higher using the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 131(b). The voltage abnormality is generated and stored when, for example, a voltage boost of less than a predetermined specified voltage value is detected in the power supplied from the power supply circuit B20. When any one of these abnormalities is written in the error management area (S1009: Yes), the control LSI 230 basically sends the error notification command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and therefore, in S1010. Move to processing. The error notification will be described later. On the other hand, when neither abnormality is written in the error management area (S1009: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S1013. Note that the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 132, which will be described later, may be applied instead of the one shown in FIG. 131(b). Further, it is also possible to apply a FAN temperature rotation speed control table as shown in FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS responds by sending a status request command, for example, in response to the error notification command transmission (S1010). When the sub CPU 400 responds (S1010: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1012. When the sub CPU 400 has not responded (S1010: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S1011.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after confirming that any abnormality is written in the error management area of the DRAM (S1011). When the predetermined time has elapsed (S1011: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1012. When the predetermined time has not elapsed (S1011: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1013.

Next, the control LSI 230 sends a rotation stop command to the FAN1 to 3 and a drive stop command to the LED driver 233 that drives the DLP control circuit 232 and the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B (S1012). As a result, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM & the reset request flag in the work area are “ON” (S1013). When the reset request flag is “ON” (S1013: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the next step S1014. When the reset request flag is not “ON” (S1013: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1015.

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S1014). The wait for reset of the watchdog timer is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing the watchdog timer (or setting a predetermined value) and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 230. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the control LSI 230, the control LSI 230 is reset, and the process is restarted from the first step (S1001) in the projector control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

In S1015, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a cycle of 4 msec, for example (S1016). After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1002.

FIG. 130 shows a self-diagnosis process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as a process according to the fourth modification. The process shown in FIG. 130 is a part of the above-described process shown in FIG. 113 modified so as to be a process suitable for the projector apparatus B2 of FIG. 128 in conjunction with the projector control main process of FIG. 129.

As shown in FIG. 130, the control LSI 230 writes, for example, “55AAH” as the diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verify check (S1021).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area exactly matches the diagnosis value (S1022). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S1022: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1024. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S1022: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S1023.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "self-diagnosis abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1023). This self-diagnosis abnormality includes an error due to the reset wait of the watchdog timer (WDT) described later. When the error information related to the self-diagnosis abnormality including such WDT reset waiting is set, the control LSI 230 transmits the command indicating the error notification to the transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S1008) shown in FIG. (See S817 of FIG. 135 described later), set the reset request flag to'ON' (see S818 and S819' of FIG. 135 described later), and described above according to the reset signal from the watchdog timer. The projector initialization process (S1001) shown in FIG. 129 is executed. Sub-control-projector transmission processing and projector initialization processing executed in this case will be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs LED temperature diagnosis processing (S1024). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signals from the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S1025). When the acquired LED temperature is normal (S1025: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1027. When the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S1025: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S1026.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "LED temperature abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1026). Specifically, the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b detect temperatures near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B. The control LSI 230 measures the respective temperatures through the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b to determine whether or not the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature based on the LED temperature control table of FIG. 131(a). If the temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature, error information indicating an abnormality related to warning or forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. The warning means a warning display before the forced shutdown, and the forced shutdown causes the main operation of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and FAN1 to 3 of the projector device B2 to be abnormal such as temperature and FAN rotation speed. It means to stop compulsorily according to.

For example, as the error information of the LED (R) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240R, a warning is set when the temperature near the LED light source 240R detected by the first temperature sensor B25a is 85° C. or more and less than 90° C. , 90°C or higher, forced shutdown is set. Further, the error information of the LED(G) temperature abnormality relating to the LED light source 240G and the error information of the LED(B) temperature abnormality relating to the LED light source 240B have different generation conditions from the error information of the LED(R) temperature abnormality, A warning is set when the temperature near the LED light source 240G or the vicinity of the LED light source 240B detected by the temperature sensor B25b is 100° C. or higher and lower than 105° C., and when the temperature is 105° C. or higher, the forced shutdown is set. When the error information relating to such an LED temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission processing (S1008) shown in FIG. (See S817 of FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (see S818 and S819' of FIG. 135 described later). (See S825 in FIG. 135 described later). The sub-control-projector transmission processing and projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs FAN rotation diagnosis processing (S1027). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signals from the pulse sensors B27a to B27c of FAN1 to 3.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S1028). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S1028: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1030. When the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S1028: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S1029.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "FAN rotation abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1029). Specifically, the pulse sensors B27a to B27c detect the rotation speeds of the FAN1 to FAN1 to 3. Further, for example, the intake air temperature sensor B26a detects the intake air temperature of FAN2 as the reference FAN temperature. The control LSI 230 measures the respective rotation speeds through the pulse sensors B27a to B27c and also measures the FAN temperature through the intake air temperature sensor B26a, so that the FAN temperature reaches a predetermined temperature based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table in FIG. (For example, 32° C.) or less is determined, and if the FAN temperature is equal to or lower than a predetermined temperature, the rotation speed of any one of FAN1 to FAN3 is individually specified predetermined rotation speed (for example, FAN1:4410 rpm, FAN2). : 4410 rpm, FAN3: 3710 rpm), error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM, and if the FAN temperature is higher than a predetermined temperature, one of FAN1 to FAN3. If the rotation speed is less than the specific rotation speed (for example, FAN1:6090 rpm, FAN2:4410 rpm, FAN3:4410 rpm) individually specified as a severer condition than the one described above, error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is displayed. Set in the error management area of DRAM.

For example, based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. 134, as the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN1, when the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a when the FAN temperature is 32° C. or lower is less than 4410 rpm. , Forced shutdown is set. Further, as the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN1, forced shutdown is set when the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a is less than 6090 rpm when the FAN temperature is higher than 32°C. Based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. 134, the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN2 and FAN3 is also set to forced shutdown when the same condition is satisfied. When such error information related to the FAN rotation speed abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S1008) shown in FIG. A command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (see S817 of FIG. 135 described later) (see S818 and S819' of FIG. 135 described later). (See S825 of FIG. 135 described later). The sub-control-projector transmission processing and projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a FAN temperature diagnosis process (S1030). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the intake air temperature as the FAN temperature based on the temperature detection signal from the intake air temperature sensor B26a, for example.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN temperature is normal (S1031). When the acquired FAN temperature is normal (S1031: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1033. When the acquired FAN temperature is not normal (S1031: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the next process of S1032. For example, a temperature sensor may be installed in each of the FANs 1 to 3 and the FAN rotation speed may be controlled according to the FAN temperatures 1 to 3 detected by the temperature sensors.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "FAN temperature abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1032). Specifically, the intake air temperature sensor B26a detects the FAN temperature (intake air temperature) near FAN2. The control LSI 230 determines whether or not the FAN temperature is equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature based on the FAN temperature control table of FIG. 131(b) by measuring the FAN temperature through the intake air temperature sensor B26a. For example, error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. For example, as the error information of the FAN temperature abnormality, if the FAN temperature detected by the intake air temperature sensor B26a is 67° C. or higher, the forced shutdown is set. When such error information related to the FAN temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S1008) shown in FIG. (See S817 of FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (see S818 and S819' of FIG. 135 described later). (See S825 in FIG. 135 described later). The sub-control-projector transmission processing and projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector power source diagnosis process (S1033). In this process, the control LSI 230 detects the operating voltage of the power supplied from the power supply circuit B20 of the projector device B2.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S1034). When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S1034: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S1036. When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is lower than the specified voltage (S1034: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S1035.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "voltage abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1035). Specifically, for example, error information of abnormal voltage indicating abnormal voltage drop is set. When the error information related to such voltage abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission processing (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (described later). 135 (see S817 of FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (see S818 and S819' of FIG. 135 described later) ( (See S825 in FIG. 135 described later). The sub-control-projector transmission processing and projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a DLP operation diagnosis process (S1036). In this process, the control LSI 230 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 232.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S1037). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S1037: Yes), the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process. When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is not normal (S1037: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S1038.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "DLP abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1038). When the error information related to such DLP abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (described later). After the reset request flag is set to'ON' (see S818 of FIG. 135) (see S818 and S819' of FIG. 135 described later), the projector initial shown in FIG. 129 described above in response to the reset signal from the watchdog timer. The conversion process (S1001) is executed. That is, since the command indicating the error notification is created as the transmission data in S1008 and the reset request flag is set to “ON”, the error notification command created in S1008 is processed by the process of S727′ in FIG. 136 after rebooting. Will be sent in. At this time, the error notification command or the information indicating the error notification may be stored in the EEPROM 231. In such a case, even if a voltage change (decrease, disconnection, abnormality due to increase, etc.) occurs due to power interruption or restart, the command and information can be retained without being erased. The sub-control-projector transmission processing and projector initialization processing executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process.

According to the projector control main process and the projector self-diagnosis process, an error notification command is transmitted to the sub control board SS according to various abnormalities of the projector device B2, and a response from the sub control board SS is sent at that time. In such a case, the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is forcibly shut down, so that the operation failure due to the heat accumulation of the projector apparatus B2 can be avoided, and the discomfort of the image that lasts for a long time can be eliminated.

Further, even if there is no response from the sub-control board SS, the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is automatically shut down after a predetermined time such as 30 seconds elapses. Therefore, the malfunction of the projector apparatus B2 can be surely avoided. You can In the case of DLP abnormality, that is, in the case of error processing by the watchdog timer, reboot (initialization processing) is performed, and error transmission is performed after the reboot. In the case of this kind of DLP abnormality, there is a high possibility that the projector device B2 is frozen and it is difficult to give an error notification to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS (for example, the communication status is not normal, the transmission is abnormal). Commands and information that should be created cannot be created normally). Therefore, error transmission is executed after rebooting. It should be noted that the DLP abnormality may be treated like any other error and the error transmission relating to the DLP abnormality may be performed before rebooting. Further, when the projector device B2 itself reboots or shuts down, communication with the sub CPU 400 is not performed for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or longer, so the sub CPU 400 detects an abnormality and the sub CPU 400 causes the projector to project. A reboot command (or a reboot) may be given to the device B2. If the sub CPU 400 cannot receive the signal from the projector device B2 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more, it is determined that the projector device B2 is likely to be performing the reboot process, and the signal is transmitted after the reboot process. When the sub CPU 400 does not receive the received error notification command (that is, when a time longer than 1000 ms, for example, 5000 ms has elapsed), the sub CPU 400 is controlled to forcibly reboot the projector device B2. Alternatively, an error may be notified.

131 shows an LED temperature control table and a FAN temperature control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as a reference table according to the fourth modification.

As shown in FIG. 131A, in the LED temperature control table, the control conditions corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the LED light source 240R (LED(R)), the LED light source 240G (LED(G)) and the LED light source 240B( It is specified that the control condition corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the LED (B) is different.

For example, regarding the LED light source 240R (LED(R)), the operation is normally controlled when the LED temperature is 0° C. or higher and lower than 85° C., and the operation is controlled without stopping when the LED temperature is 85° C. or higher and lower than 90° C. However, it is controlled so as to perform warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality by the projected image on the screen or the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and when the LED temperature becomes 90° C. or more, the projector device B2 Controlled to force shutdown of major operations. At the time of the warning, the corresponding processing is performed by the control LSI 230, and the command related to the error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS, and the projector device B2 displays the projection image showing the warning on the screen. On the other hand, on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed. At the time of forced shutdown, an error notification command is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS, so that an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19.

On the other hand, regarding the LED light source 240G (LED(G)) and the LED light source 240B (LED(B)), if the LED temperature is 0°C or higher and lower than 100°C, the operation is normally controlled, and the LED temperature is 100°C or higher and 105°C or higher. Although the operation is controlled without stopping when the temperature is lower than ℃, it is controlled to perform warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality by the projected image on the screen and the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and further, the LED temperature is When the temperature is 105° C. or higher, the main operation of the projector device B2 is controlled to be forcedly shut down. At the time of such a warning as well, the corresponding processing is performed by the control LSI 230, and a command relating to an error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and in the projector device B2, a warning is displayed on the screen. While the projected image is displayed, an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. In addition, since the command relating to the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS even during the forced shutdown, an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. The image indicating the warning or the shutdown is projected by the projector device B2 and also displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD19 in the same manner as the projected image. Thereby, even if the projection by the projector device B2 is difficult or impossible, or even if the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19 is difficult or impossible, an image showing a warning or a shutdown is displayed by one of the display means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player or the game hall manager of that fact. At this time, in addition to the projection by the projector device B2 and the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19, an error is generated from the external centralized terminal board 31 of the gaming machine 1 to the management device of the game hall such as a hall computer or an island control computer. You may make it notify and notify. In addition, as the display means of the present embodiment, a projection device, a screen, a liquid crystal display device, a display device that lights up on a dot-by-dot basis using an LED, a touch panel, a flexible liquid crystal display device, an illumination array (registered trademark), a transparent liquid crystal A display, a transparent screen, a movable accessory, an immovable accessory, and the like can be applied. The number of projector devices, screens, and liquid crystal display devices is not particularly limited. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the security signal is externally output from the main control board MS or the payout/launch control circuit (not shown) via the external centralized terminal board 31, but from the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. The security signal may be output to the outside.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131(b), the FAN temperature control table basically defines the FAN temperature (intake air temperature) of FAN2 as a target, and defines the control condition according to the FAN temperature.

For example, when the FAN temperature is 0°C or higher and lower than 67°C, the operation is normally controlled, and when the FAN temperature is 67°C or higher, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down without warning (warning display). Controlled by. Even during such forced shutdown due to the FAN temperature, an error notification command is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS, so that an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. To be done. Even in this case, the image indicating the warning or the shutdown is projected by the projector device B2 and displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD19 in the same manner as the projected image. Thereby, even if the projection by the projector device B2 is difficult or impossible, or even if the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19 is difficult or impossible, an image showing a warning or a shutdown is displayed by one of the display means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player or the game hall manager of that fact. Further, in addition to the projection by the projector device B2 and the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19, the external centralized terminal board 31 of the gaming machine 1 notifies the management device of the game hall such as a hall computer or an island computer that an error has occurred. You may make it notify.

According to such an LED temperature control table and a FAN temperature control table, the LED temperatures of the LED light source 240R (LED(R)), the LED light source 240G (LED(G)), and the LED light source 240B (LED(B)) are calculated. When the temperature rises and exceeds the specified temperature (for example, LED (R): 85°C, LED (G), (B): 100°C), a warning is given that it is judged as abnormal, and the LED temperature further rises. Then, even if the temperature exceeds a specified temperature (for example, LED(R): 90° C., LED(G), (B): 105° C.) or the intake air temperature (FAN temperature) near FAN2 is lower than the LED temperature, When the temperature exceeds (for example, 67° C.), the main operation of the projector apparatus B2 is temporarily stopped by the forced shutdown. Therefore, the malfunction of the projector apparatus B2 due to the heat accumulation is notified in advance by a warning and appropriately avoided. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the image which may take a long time.

Further, according to the LED temperature control table and the FAN temperature control table, when the temperature of the LED (R) is, for example, 85° C. or higher, or the temperature of the LEDs (G) and (B) is higher, for example, 100° C. or higher, An error warning is issued to the CPU 400, and the temperature of the LED (R) further rises to 90° C. or higher, or the temperature of the LEDs (G) and (B) rises to 105° C. or higher, or , If the intake air temperature of FAN2 is lower than the temperature (85° C.) at which a warning (error warning) of the LED(R) is performed and is equal to or higher than the prescribed temperature of FAN2, for example, 67° C., the operation of the projector device B2 is performed. Is temporarily stopped by forced shutdown, so that a malfunction of the projector apparatus B2 due to heat buildup is notified in advance by a warning to the sub CPU 400, and appropriately avoided to eliminate the uncomfortableness of a long-time image. You can The temperature (85° C.) at which the LED(R) is warned is not limited to the LED(R), but is a temperature that serves as a criterion for the abnormality occurrence of the entire LED including the LED(G) and the LED(B). May be That is, when there are a plurality of types of LEDs such as LED (R), LED (G), and LED (B), the presence or absence of an abnormality may be determined based on any one of the LED temperatures. The intake air temperature of the fan 2 is a temperature that can be recognized as a temperature around the intake fan, a temperature of the intake fan itself, a temperature outside the projector device, an outside air temperature, or the like.

Further, according to the LED temperature control table and the FAN temperature control table, for example, when the temperature of the LED (R) becomes 85° C. or higher, a warning is given to the sub CPU 400, and accordingly, a warning regarding error notification is displayed on the screen. Is projected and displayed, and a similar image showing a warning related to error notification is separately displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. Further, when the temperature of the LED (R) rises to, for example, 90° C. or higher, or the intake air temperature of the FAN 2 rises to, for example, 67° C. or higher, an error notification is given to the sub CPU 400, and the warning is issued accordingly. After the image relating to the different error notification is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly stopped by the response from the sub CPU 400 to the error notification. As a result, the malfunction of the projector device B2 due to the heat accumulation is notified in advance by an error notification related to a warning and an error notification related to a forced shutdown after that, and appropriately avoided to prevent the uncomfortableness of an image that extends for a long time. It can be resolved. In such a case, if there is no response from the sub CPU 400 even after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to forcefully shut down.

FIG. 132 shows a FAN temperature control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as a table according to the fifth modification. The table shown in FIG. 132 is an improved version of the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 131(b).

In the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 132, the control condition corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the intake air temperature (FAN2) and the control condition corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the exhaust temperature (FAN3) are defined to be different.

For example, the intake air temperature is controlled to forcibly shut down the main operation of the projector device B2 when the intake air temperature reaches 67° C. or higher, as in the case shown in FIG. 131(b). At the time of forced shutdown, an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. On the other hand, regarding the exhaust gas temperature, the operation is normally controlled until it reaches, for example, 75° C. which is higher than the intake air temperature, and is controlled without stopping at 75° C. or more and less than 80° C. The projection image and the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 are controlled to perform warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality, and when the exhaust temperature becomes 80° C. or higher, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down. Controlled. At the time of such a warning as well, the corresponding processing is performed by the control LSI 230, and a command relating to an error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and in the projector device B2, a warning is displayed on the screen. While the projected image is displayed, an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. In addition, since the command relating to the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS even during the forced shutdown, an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19.

FIG. 133 shows a projector error notification reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the sixth modification. The process shown in FIG. 133 is a modification of part of the process shown in FIG. 93 described above so that the process is suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 133, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector error occurrence process in response to an error notification from the projector control board B23 (S1041).

Next, if the projector error is a warning, the sub CPU 400 makes a display request to both the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the projector device B2 so as to notify the warning by making full use of both the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the projector device B2. A response signal (command) corresponding to the error notification is transmitted to the server (S1042). If the projector error is not a warning, the sub CPU 400 skips the processing of S1042 and moves to the processing of the next S1043.

Next, if the projector error is shutdown, the sub CPU 400 issues a display request to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 so that the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 notifies the shutdown of the projector device B2, and thereafter, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. When the display device DD19 is informed of shutdown, a response signal (command) corresponding to the error notification is then transmitted to the projector device B2 (S1043).

Next, the sub CPU 400 issues a sound projector error occurrence output request to the speaker group 62 in order to notify by sound of an error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) (S1044). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector error notification reception process.

By using the FAN temperature control table of FIG. 132 in combination with the LED temperature control table of FIG. 131(a) to execute the projector error notification reception process of FIG. 133, for example, the LED(R) When the temperature is 85° C. or higher, or the exhaust temperature of the FAN 3 becomes lower than that temperature, for example, 75° C. or higher, an error notification relating to a warning is issued to the sub CPU 400 by determining that it is abnormal, and further LED(R) If the temperature rises to 90° C. or higher, or if the intake air temperature of FAN2 becomes lower than the exhaust temperature, for example, 67° C. or higher, the operation of the projector device B2 is automatically stopped by forced shutdown. A malfunction of the projector device B2 due to heat accumulation can be notified in advance by a warning to the sub CPU 400 and appropriately avoided, and the discomfort of an image that lasts for a long time can be eliminated.

FIG. 134 shows a FAN temperature rotation speed control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as a table according to the seventh modification.

As shown in FIG. 134, in the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, it is defined that the shutdown control condition is different based on the lower limit of the FAN rotation speed defined for each of FAN1 to 3. Further, as the FAN temperature, for example, the intake air temperature of FAN2 is applied.

For example, if the FAN temperature (FAN2) is 32° C. or less, and if the FAN1 for intake is below the lower limit of 4410 rpm defined as the lower limit value, the intake capacity is insufficient and it is determined that there is an error in the number of intakes. For FAN2, if the FAN speed is less than 4410 rpm specified as the lower limit value, it is determined that there is a rotation speed error due to insufficient intake capacity, and for exhaust FAN3, the FAN speed is less than 3710 rpm specified as the lower limit value. Then, the intake capacity is insufficient and it is determined that there is a rotation speed error. When it is determined that there is a rotation speed error, the main operation of the projector device B2 is controlled to be forcedly shut down.

On the other hand, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is higher than 32° C., it is required to exhibit a larger intake/exhaust (ventilation) capacity. Therefore, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) becomes higher than 32° C., the lower limit value of a part of the FAN rotation speed is raised. As a result, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is higher than 32° C., with regard to the intake fan FAN1, when the FAN rotation speed becomes less than 6090 rpm which is defined as the higher lower limit value, it is determined that the rotation speed error is due to insufficient intake capacity. When the FAN rotational speed of the intake fan 2 is less than 4410 rpm which is defined as the same lower limit value as the above, it is determined that the rotational speed error is due to insufficient intake capacity, and the exhaust fan FAN 3 has the FAN rotational speed of the above. When it is less than 4410 rpm which is defined as a higher lower limit value, it is determined that there is a rotation speed error due to insufficient intake capacity. Even when it is determined that there is a rotation speed error, the main operation of the projector device B2 is controlled to be forcedly shut down.

According to such a FAN temperature rotation speed control table, when the FAN temperature becomes higher than, for example, 32° C., the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown, while the FAN temperature becomes 32° C. or less, such a temperature situation occurs. Accordingly, with respect to the exhaust fan 3 and the intake fan 1, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown according to the respective fan rotation speeds. Further, when the FAN temperature is 32° C. or lower, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown according to the fan rotation speed of the intake fan FAN2 corresponding to the FAN temperature, so that the projector device B2 is not heated. It is possible to appropriately avoid the malfunction due to the accumulation depending on the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and to eliminate the uncomfortableness of the image for a long time.

Further, according to the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed of the exhaust fan 3, while the intake fan air temperature is controlled regardless of the detected fan temperature. Since the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown even in accordance with the FAN rotation speed of the FAN2, the malfunction of the projector device B2 due to the heat accumulation is appropriately avoided in accordance with the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and the operation is performed for a long time. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the image that extends.

Further, according to the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown according to the FAN temperatures of the intake fan 2 and the exhaust fan 3 and the intake fan 1. Therefore, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device B2 can be appropriately avoided in accordance with the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and the discomfort of the image for a long time can be eliminated.

It should be noted that all of the FANs 1 to 3 are each provided with a temperature sensor, and the FANs of the respective FANs 1 to 3 are provided in accordance with the airflow temperatures passing through the respective FANs 1 to 3 detected via the respective temperature sensors. You may make it stop control by rotation speed and shutdown.

FIG. 135 shows a sub-control-projector transmission process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as a process according to the eighth modification. The process shown in FIG. 135 is executed in S1008 of the projector control main process of FIG. 129 described above, and is a partial modification of only the process of S819 shown in FIG. 114 described above. Therefore, in FIG. 135, the processes other than S819' are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only the process of S819' will be described.

As shown in FIG. 135, in S819', the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the reset request flag in the work area to "ON". After that, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector transmission process. That is, in the case of a self-diagnosis error or DLP error that includes an error due to the watchdog timer (WDT) resetting waiting, the command of “error notification” indicating these errors is not immediately transmitted, and the reset request flag is turned “ON”. In response to the', the watchdog timer (WDT) waits for the reset signal to be output, and when the reset signal is output, the projector initialization process shown in FIG. 136 is executed by rebooting. Becomes

FIG. 136 shows a projector initialization process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as a process according to the eighth modification. The process shown in FIG. 136 is executed in S1001 of the projector control main process of FIG. 129 described above, and is a partial improvement of only the process of S727 shown in FIG. 109 described above. Therefore, in FIG. 136, the processes other than S727' are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only the process of S319' will be described.

As shown in FIG. 136, in S727′, the control LSI 230 initializes various flags & work areas of the DRAM, and performs self-diagnosis abnormality (watchdog timer (WDT) before this projector initialization process by rebooting). (Including the reset wait error)) and an'error notification' command indicating a DLP abnormality are created, the command of'error notification' is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector initialization process.

According to the projector control main process and the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, and the sub-control-projector transmission time process and the projector initialization process shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the LED of the projector device B2 ( (R, G, B), FAN1 to 3 or FAN1 to 3 or the power supply circuit B20 becomes abnormal due to a thermal factor, the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is forced to shut down after an error notification is given to the sub CPU 400 accordingly. To be stopped. On the other hand, for example, if the watchdog timer is not cleared (or set to a predetermined value) and falls into an infinite loop and abnormal processing is performed, the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is stopped in this case as well, but rebooted (restarted). By this, when the watchdog timer is reset and the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is restored, an error notification is given to the sub CPU 400. Therefore, after surely informing the sub CPU 400 of various malfunctions of the projector apparatus B2, It can be avoided.

As described above, when the abnormality processing is performed using the watchdog timer, there is a high possibility that the projector device B2 is frozen, and thus the normal operation is unlikely to be guaranteed, and an early reboot ( Reset or restart) is required. Even if an attempt is made to send a send command at this stage, there is a high possibility that the send command will not be sent normally. Therefore, it is desirable to control the sub CPU 400 so that an error is notified after the reboot. As described above, when the projector device B2 is frozen, the watchdog timer is not cleared and the time is up (including counts of addition type and subtraction type). Therefore, the projector device B2 is rebooted and an error occurs after rebooting. Notification will be given. It should be noted that the reboot can also be recognized as a process for restarting. Further, when the abnormality processing is performed using the watchdog timer, there is a high possibility that it is frozen and normal projection is difficult, so that the liquid crystal display device DD19 and the gaming machine 1 are Component members (for example, frame component members, board component members, front door component members, cabinets, reels, levers, segment indicators and light sources (mainly, for example, LEDs) of the payout control board, segment displays provided on the housing Vessel and light source (eg LED), body frame member, dish unit, gaming machine side surface member, button, front panel (including liquid product display device), projector device B2 component member, projector device B2 projection reflection The abnormality may be notified by various constituent members such as a reflecting member, a decorative member protruding from the frame, and the like. According to this, even when various abnormalities are detected except when the abnormality processing is performed by using the watchdog timer, the abnormality is caused by the above-mentioned constituent members of the gaming machine 1 and the projection by the projector device B2. It is possible to perform notification and display (for example, error notification, warning, warning, abnormality notification, etc.) related to.

Further, regarding abnormal operation of the gaming machine 1 and the projector device B2, external communication means (external centralized terminal board 31, wireless communication means, short-range wireless communication, optical communication means, encrypted communication means, decryption communication) of the gaming machine 1 Means, encryption and decryption communication means, etc.), external communication means provided in the projector device B2, and the like, and devices in the game hall (for example, hall computer, island computer, sand device, outbox, counting each unit). Machine, game medium lending device with counter, data display, digital signage, representative lamp, call button, game medium number notification means (for example, a case that drives or emits light to notify the number of game media), Management device, peripheral device, CR unit, etc.) to notify that an error has occurred, as one means of various combinations of the exemplified devices, or a plurality of means. The game machine 1 can communicate with the outside using various communication modes. When such an error is notified to the outside, the manager of the gaming machine turns on/off the power of the gaming machine 1 (power interruption and restoration of power interruption, change of setting, etc.), and the setting screen of the gaming machine. It is possible to perform an operation for eliminating an error from (a setting screen for a player, a setting screen for a game hall, etc.). As the game medium, various game media such as the number of game media on the data are assumed in addition to medals and balls. In addition, it can be applied to a gaming machine in which the number of game media (balls held, balls paid out, balls rented, balls accumulated, credits, number of shots, number of payouts, number of foul balls, etc.) in the data increases or decreases. In addition, the possessed ball, the paid out ball, the rented ball, and the stored coin are terms applicable to various game media such as medals and balls. Further, in the case of an error of rebooting in the present embodiment, error information (self-diagnosis abnormality, DLP abnormality, reset request flag, or the like) stored before rebooting at the time of restart is stored (for example, in the EEPROM). Since it is stored and stored in a storage area that is not cleared before and after rebooting, it is possible to send an error notification during the initialization process that is executed when the system is restarted. It is also possible to clear part or all, clear only work area related to error notification, etc.). In addition, it is also possible to simply use the watchdog timer to determine whether the communication between the boards or the communication between the control devices is normally performed, and in this case also, the abnormality detection using the watchdog timer can be performed. You can also use the phrase "do". The error information transmitted to the sub CPU 400 after the projector device B2 is rebooted is transmitted at the time of initialization processing executed when the power is turned on or rebooted, but the invention is not limited to this. The error information may be transmitted in the step after the conversion processing.

FIG. 137 shows a projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as a process according to the ninth modification. The process shown in FIG. 137 is a part of the above-described process shown in FIG. 88 modified so that the process is suitable for the projector device B2 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 137, the sub CPU 400 receives a command indicating that the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 is'projector' for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more. It is determined whether or not (S1051). When the command is not received for the predetermined time or more (S1051: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1052. When any command is received within the predetermined time (S1051: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1053. At this time, if the received data is normal, it is transmitted at a cycle of, for example, 500 ms using the transmission cycle counter, so that the presence or absence of received data is monitored based on 1000 ms, which is a longer time than that. ing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a projector error occurrence display request output to the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL in order to display an error of the projector control board B23 (projector apparatus B2) on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S1052). ). As a result, if no response is received from the projector device B2 even after a lapse of time such as 500 ms or more, an image or the like for notifying an error of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In step S1053, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area indicates “projector”. When the transmission source ID indicates “projector” (S1053: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1054. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “projector” (S1053: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector control reception data consistency check processing for controlling the projector apparatus B2 (S1054). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1055). When the consistency of the received data is abnormal (S1055: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1056. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1055: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1057.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S1056). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In step S1057, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception process. This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 89 described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector drift correction processing (S1058). This processing corresponds to the processing in FIG. 95 described above. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

According to such a projector control process, the operation of the projector apparatus B2 should be restored by, for example, rebooting, but the sub CPU 400 causes the sub CPU 400 to perform a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) longer than the transmission time interval of the projector apparatus B2 (for example, 500 ms). For example, if there is no predetermined response from the projector device B2 even after 1000 ms), it is determined that the projector device B2 has some operation failure that cannot be restored by rebooting, and that effect is indicated by an image related to the error notification. It can be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As a result, any malfunction of the projector device B2 can be reliably and promptly notified by error notification and then avoided. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 1000 ms as an example, and various times can be set, such as 500 ms or more if the transmission time interval for one communication is 500 ms.

FIG. 138 shows a projector control reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as a process according to the tenth modification. In the process shown in FIG. 138, the process of S448 shown in FIG. 89 described above is the process of FIG. 140 described later, and only the process of S449 is deleted. Therefore, in FIG. 138, the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 89 are used and the description thereof is omitted, and the case of S445: No and the processing of S450 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 138, if there is no request to change the projector setting value (S445: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S450. In S450, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process. In the tenth modification, the parameter request command transmitted from the projector control board B23 does not include parameter values such as setting change and status. For example, a focus position setting change including a focus position origin adjustment described later is performed. A parameter value indicating whether or not the request is to change the projector setting value is included. That is, from the projector control board B23, a command for requesting a parameter can be transmitted at an arbitrary timing. Based on the parameter value included in such a command, in S445, it is determined whether or not there is a request for changing the projector setting value. Is determined. When a parameter request command is transmitted from the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing, the sub CPU 400 receives the parameter request command (or upon receipt of the command), the projector device B2. If there is a request for changing the projector setting value such as the focus position adjustment, changing the projection content, moving the screen, etc., the projector setting value and parameters can be transmitted to the projector device B2. In this way, the projector device B2 side can control the transmission timing of the command transmitted from the sub CPU 400, or the projector device B2 periodically transmits the parameter request command to the sub CPU 400. It is also possible to notify the sub CPU 400 that the command can be received. Further, although the timing for transmitting the command for parameter request from the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 to the sub CPU 400 is set to a predetermined interval (for example, 500 ms interval, constant interval, constant cycle, etc.), it is not limited to these. The parameter may be transmitted to the projector control board B23 when the sub CPU 400 determines to change the parameter of the projector device B2. In addition, when the command of the parameter request is transmitted from the projector control board B23 at a predetermined interval, the transmission/reception processing in one process (for example, the transmission/reception processing during the projector apparatus startup, the transmission/reception processing during the parameter change in the projector apparatus, the error in progress It is conceivable that the parameter request command may be received a plurality of times during the transmission/reception process (1), etc., and it is assumed that the start of the transmission/reception process in one process and the parameter request command reception do not correspond one-on-one. In such a case, it is desirable that the sub CPU 400 independently transmits to the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing as described above. The parameter request command, the reception confirmation command transmitted from the projector device B2 to the sub CPU 400, or the setting completion command transmitted from the sub CPU 400 to the projector device B2 have duplicate commands and have special meanings. Unless specified, some commands may be discarded. By sending and receiving commands regularly in this manner, unnecessary commands are discarded (or only the reception confirmation of the received command is performed and the subsequent processing is performed) while monitoring that the communication status is normal. It is possible to simplify the processing.

FIG. 139 shows projector drift correction processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as processing according to the tenth modification. The processing shown in FIG. 139 is obtained by modifying a part of the processing shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 139, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a focus position setting change request based on a parameter request command from the projector control board B23 (S1061). This request for changing the setting of the focus position is issued when the focus position should be changed while temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin described later and performing drift correction. If there is a request to change the setting of the focus position (S1061: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1062. If there is no focus position setting change request (S1061: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1063. Regarding the movement to the focus position, the method of obtaining the focus position after incorporating the drift correction in advance and the method of moving the focus position according to the offset value without incorporating the drift correction, and then performing the drift correction There is a method of moving the focus position, but either method may be applied, or either method may be appropriately selected depending on the situation. Further, the focus position may be moved by the drift correction and then the predetermined focus position may be further moved according to the situation, or the focus movement may be performed collectively from the position before the movement to the position after the movement. The focus position may be moved. Focus control at that time is such as when grasping the position before movement, grasping the position after movement without grasping the position before movement, or grasping only the amount of movement. Various controls are possible.

In step S1062, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command with the projector control board B23 as the transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41. At this time, the drift correction temperature is specified as a parameter in the status request command. Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. The command set in the process of S1062 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 of FIG. 138 described above.

In S1063, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'drift correction temperature'. When the received command is “drift correction temperature” (S1063: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1064. When the received command is not'drift correction temperature' (S1063: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and also acquires the position coefficient of the focus position (S1064). As described above, the position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining the optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the acquired drift correction temperature and position coefficient (S1065). The focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature, as described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S1065 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S1066). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S1066: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S1066: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1067.

Next, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and stores the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area (S1067).

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for requesting a setting change of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S1068).

Next, the sub CPU 400 increments the focus drift correction number counter by 1 (S1069). The drift correction number counter is an addition counter for accumulating the number of times the focus position drift correction is performed in response to the focus drift correction value being rewritten by the drift correction temperature. The focus drift correction number counter is set to an initial value in the process in which it is determined that the focus drift correction will be performed after returning the focus position to the focus origin, which will be described later, and 1 is added when the focus drift correction is actually performed. It That is, when the focus drift correction is performed after returning to the focus origin, in order to count the next focus drift correction as the first time, -1 is set as the initial value of the focus drift correction number counter. The initial value of the focus drift correction number counter is also set when the projector device B2 is started. Further, since the case where the focus drift correction is performed after returning the focus position to the origin is counted as the first focus drift correction, the initial value of the focus drift correction counter may be set to zero. Furthermore, when the initial value of the focus drift correction counter is set to 0, it is possible to return to the focus origin and not perform counting when the focus drift correction is performed. Regarding the focus drift correction, the temperature when the focus drift correction was performed last time (the temperature of the LED, the fan, the projector device, etc.) is compared with the temperature when the focus drift correction is performed this time, and based on the comparison result. It may be performed according to the amount of change in temperature, or depending on the temperature when (or when) focus movement (including electric focus movement or image movement by software image processing) is performed, or other predetermined conditions The focus may be adjusted by adjusting the focus.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S1070). Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. Thereby, the drift correction of the focus position is performed according to the drift correction temperature. The drift correction is a process of moving from the focus position before correction for each drift correction temperature by a difference amount according to the drift correction, and the drift error included in the difference amount increases as the number of drift corrections increases. Regarding such a drift error, the focus position is temporarily returned to the focus positions A to E (hereinafter, referred to as “focus origin”) that are reference positions for each projection plane, and then the focus position is adjusted to a position according to an adjustment value or an offset. By moving the position and then moving the focus position by the difference amount according to the drift correction, the drift error accumulated up to that point is eliminated. This will be described later. Note that the focus position may be calculated by transmitting the electric focus position offset and the focus correction value, which are necessary information for that purpose, from the sub CPU 400, and the projector device B2 may perform the calculation based on the information. Further, it is considered that the drift error is caused by the following factors. That is, since the electric focus adjustment according to the drift correction temperature is physically performed by making full use of the focus motor 242C, if this is performed every 1° C. change, the focus motor 242C is drive-controlled extremely finely. Becomes At this time, if the focus motor 242C is driven swiftly and with high accuracy so as not to give the player a feeling of strangeness while projecting an image, the possibility of so-called motor step-out increases, and if the motor step-out occurs, the control circuit An error occurs between the focus position recognized on the side and the actual physical focus position. Since such a phenomenon is likely to occur when the electric focus adjustment is extremely finely performed, the electric focus adjustment is performed at a predetermined drift correction temperature (for example, a temperature change of 1 to 5° C.) as described later. This can be dealt with by controlling not to make adjustments. Further, if the drive speed of the focus motor 242C is suppressed, it is considered that the possibility of motor out-of-step is reduced, but there is a demerit that the focus time becomes long, and the focus required when the image is continuously projected. If the electric focus adjustment is performed by spending time, the image may be distorted or strange to the player. This is particularly likely to occur remarkably when a plurality of projection targets (screens) are provided and the projection targets are changed as in the present embodiment. Therefore, when the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the image is visually disturbed (for example, during the demonstration, in the dark, during a stage change for performance, etc.), the drive speed of the focus motor 242C is set to the normal case. It is also possible to deal with it by setting a slower speed.

FIG. 140 shows a projector setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 140 is a part of the above-described process shown in FIG. 91 modified so that the process is suitable for the projector device B2 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 140, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change content of the projector setting value received as an argument (S1071).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) (S1072). When the content of the setting change is the horizontal position offset (S1072: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1073. When the content of the setting change is not the horizontal position offset (S1072: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1074.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs horizontal position offset command transmission processing (S1073). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and issues a command for setting the horizontal position offset to the projector control substrate B23. To send. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing. The horizontal position offset (horizontal image position offset) in the present embodiment is the horizontal position of the projection image that is horizontally offset-adjusted from the reference position for each projection surface, and the entire projection image is adjusted without performing electric focus adjustment. Means the position to be finely adjusted in the horizontal direction.

In S1074, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is the vertical position offset. When the setting change content is the vertical position offset (S1074: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1075. When the content of the setting change is not the vertical position offset (S1074: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1076.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs vertical position offset command transmission processing (S1075). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the vertical position offset in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sends a command for setting the vertical position offset to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing. The vertical position offset (vertical image position offset) in this embodiment is the vertical position of the projection image that is vertically offset-adjusted from the reference position for each projection surface, and the entire projection image is adjusted without performing electric focus adjustment. Means the position to be finely adjusted in the vertical direction. That is, since the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset control which two-dimensional position within the projection range the projected image is displayed, the projected image can be moved without electric focus adjustment. Is. The focus position may be moved by electric focus adjustment, the horizontal position and the vertical position of the projection image may be moved during rendering, and the position of the projection image may be changed by software image processing. Further, the electric focus adjustment may be performed based on the values of the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset.

In S1076, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is the focus offset. When the setting change content is the focus offset (S1076: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1077. If the setting change content is not the focus offset (S1076: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1079.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs focus origin adjustment instruction transmission processing (S1077). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus position offset command transmission process (S1078). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and the projector control command (focus position offset command) for setting the focus position offsets A to E is controlled. It transmits to the board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S1079, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is focus drift correction. When the setting change content is focus drift correction (S1079: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1080. When the setting change content is not the focus drift correction (S1079: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1082.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs focus origin adjustment instruction transmission processing (S1080). This process is the same as the process of S1077, and will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus drift correction value command transmission process (S1081). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and sets a command (focus drift correction value command) for setting the focus drift correction values A to E. Is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S1082, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the LED brightness setting. When the setting change content is the LED brightness setting (S1082: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1083. When the setting change content is not the LED brightness setting (S1082: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1084.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an LED brightness setting command transmission process (S1083). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sends a command for setting the LED brightness to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S1084, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value. If the setting change content is the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S1084: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1085. When the content of the setting change is not the keystone distortion correction value (S1084: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1086.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission processing (S1085). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sends a command for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S1086, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is contrast setting. When the content of the setting change is the contrast setting (S1086: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1087. When the content of the setting change is not the contrast setting (S1086: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1088.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a contrast setting command transmission process (S1087). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sends a command for setting the contrast to the projector control substrate B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S1088, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is gamma setting. When the content of the setting change is gamma setting (S1088: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1089. If the setting change content is not gamma setting (S1088: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1090.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a gamma setting command transmission process (S1089). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sends a command for setting the gamma value to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S1090, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is white color temperature. When the setting change content is the white color temperature (S1090: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1091. When the content of the setting change is not the white color temperature (S1090: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1092.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a white color temperature command transmission process (S1091). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the white color temperature in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and sends a command for setting the white color temperature to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In S1092, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is brightness. When the content of the setting change is the brightness (S1092: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1093. When the content of the setting change is not brightness (S1092: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1094.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a brightness command transmission process (S1093). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the brightness in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sends a command for setting the brightness to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing.

In step S1094, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a test pattern. When the setting change content is the test pattern (S1094: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1095. If the setting change content is not the test pattern (S1094: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S1095). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the test pattern in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sends a command for setting the test pattern to the projector control substrate B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change processing. Such a projector setting change process is executed when a maintenance worker in the game hall or an inspection worker performs various optical adjustments on the projector device B2 before shipping from the factory.

FIG. 141 shows focus origin adjustment instruction transmission processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as processing according to the tenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 141, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the focus origin adjustment flag is “ON” (S1101). The origin adjustment flag is flag information for designating whether or not to return the focus position to the focus origin. When the focus origin adjustment flag is'ON' (S1101: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1102. When the focus origin adjustment flag is not “ON” (S1101: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process.

In step S1102, the sub CPU 400 sets a command indicating a focus origin adjustment instruction. This command, together with the focus position offset command or the focus drift correction value command, is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the processes of S1078 and S1081 of FIG. 140 described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to “OFF”. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process.

FIG. 142 shows a projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as a process according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 142 is obtained by modifying a part of the process shown in FIG. 88 described above so that the process is suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 142, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 indicates “projector” (S1110). When the transmission source ID indicates “projector” (S1110: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1111. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “projector” (S431: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1118.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception data consistency check process for controlling the projector device B2 (S1111). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets 0 to the reception counter of the projector control reception data (S1112). This reception counter is for counting the commands transmitted from the control LSI 230 at a transmission cycle of 500 ms as an example in the present embodiment. For example, if the value of the reception counter is 3 or more, it means that at least 1000 ms or more has elapsed since the reception counter was reset to 0.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data from the return value of the check result of the process of S1111 (S1113). When there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1113: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1114. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1113: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1115.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S1114). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S1118.

In step S1115, the sub CPU 400 performs focus origin adjustment determination processing. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception time process (S1116). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 138 described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector drift correction processing (S1117). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 139 described above. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S1118, the sub CPU 400 increments the reception counter of the projector control reception data by 1.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the reception counter of the projector control reception data is 3 or more (S1119). That is, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not at least 1000 ms has elapsed since the reception counter was reset. When the value of the reception counter is 3 or more and at least 1000 ms or more has elapsed (S1119: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1120. On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter is less than 2 and 1000 ms has not elapsed (S1119: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In step S1120, the sub CPU 400 causes the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 to display an image or the like related to the error notification. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

FIG. 143 shows focus origin adjustment determination processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as processing according to the tenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 143, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not it is during demo shift (during demo command reception) (S1121). The demo means a state in which an image similar to the actual effect is displayed by the projector device B2 or the like when a predetermined time has elapsed without inserting a medal, and the demo command is the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. Is transmitted from the sub CPU 400 to the sub CPU 400 when shifting to the demo mode. The process of transmitting the demo command will be described later with reference to FIG. 151. When it is the time of the demo shift (S1121: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1128. When it is not the time of the shift to the demo ((S1121): No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1122.

In S1122, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the chance state (hereinafter referred to as “CT”) is started as a game state. CT is a game state in which, for example, the reel screen mechanism F1 is used as a projection target while displaying an image for presentation. The transition of the game state including this CT will be described later with reference to FIG. When it is the time to start CT (S1122: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1128. If it is not the time to start CT, the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1123.

In S1123, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the setting of the member menu. The member menu is called as a screen as shown in FIG. 124 when the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, password input operation) on the touch panel DD19T. The player can arbitrarily select whether or not to adjust the origin. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the member menu (S1123: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1128. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is not selected by the member menu, the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1124.

In S1124, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether the drift correction number is, for example, 30 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1124: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1125. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1124: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1126.

In S1125, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1128.

In S1126, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the number of symbol variations (or the number of games, the number of starts, etc.) has reached 300 times or more in the state where the focus origin adjustment flag is'OFF'. The number of symbol fluctuations means the number of times counted each time the variable display of the symbols (identification information) is started by rotationally driving the reels RL, RC, RR. The number of times of change of the symbol (the number of times of change display of the identification information) is counted by using the change counter. When the focus origin adjustment flag is'OFF' and the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 300 times or more (S1126: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1127. Even if the focus origin adjustment flag is'OFF', if the number of symbol variations is less than 300 times (S1126: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

In S1127, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the variation counter that counts the number of symbol variations when the focus origin adjustment flag is in the “OFF” state.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to "ON" (S1128).

Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a focus position setting change request in order to change the focus position while returning the focus position to the focus origin and then performing drift correction (S1129). In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores the setting change request data including the origin adjustment of the focus position in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the contents of temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin and then changing the focus position. Thus, for example, when the screen to which the image is projected is switched, the projector device B2 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the focus position setting change request data to temporarily return the focus position to the focus origin, and then respectively. It is possible to focus the projection lens 210 while performing drift correction at the focus position corresponding to the screen. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

According to the processing of FIGS. 138 to 143 as described above, the focus position is compensated by the drift correction even when the temperature of the projector device B2 rises, and the drift error is accumulated for each drift correction. By changing the setting so that the focus position once returns to the focus origin in accordance with the gaming state (CT), and further the setting in the member menu, all drift errors accumulated up to that point are removed. Therefore, for the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing the drift correction during the electric focus control, it is possible to effectively suppress the image quality deterioration due to the drift correction at an appropriate timing.

Further, even when the number of drift corrections reaches a predetermined number of times, for example, 30 times or more, the setting is changed so that the focus position once returns to the focus origin at the time of drift correction, so that all drift errors accumulated so far are removed. Therefore, also with this, it is possible to effectively suppress the image quality deterioration due to the drift correction for the image projected from the projector device B2 while repeatedly performing the drift correction.

In addition, even if the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, for example, 300 times or more without returning the focus position to the focus origin, the focus position is changed so that the focus position once returns to the focus origin. Since all the errors are removed, this also makes it possible to effectively suppress the image quality deterioration due to the drift correction for the image projected from the projector device B2 by repeatedly changing the focus position.

It should be noted that the control subject that changes the setting of the focus position is not limited to the sub CPU 400, and for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 itself may change the setting of the focus position. In this case, the control LSI 230 automatically adjusts the focus position by, for example, monitoring the LED temperature and performing feedback control such that the focus position is once returned to the focus origin and drift correction is performed according to the LED temperature. be able to. At this time, whether or not the setting change accompanied by the origin adjustment of the focus position can be appropriately determined according to the flag and the condition regarding the origin adjustment of the focus position.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a main series of processes of the projector control process is executed in response to a command transmitted from the projector device B2 at a transmission cycle of, for example, 500 ms, and the focus position is processed by the process of S1115 in the series of processes. It is determined whether or not the origin adjustment is performed. Therefore, the timing at which the origin adjustment of the focus position is actually performed may be delayed from the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied due to a slight time lag, but especially regarding the setting change accompanied by the origin adjustment of the focus position, The command may be immediately transmitted to the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When it is necessary to send a command to change the focus position, the command may be sent immediately at that time. The projector device B2 can immediately adjust the origin of the focus position in response to receiving such a command, and can change the focus position while performing drift correction.

FIG. 144 shows an effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the eleventh modification. The process shown in FIG. 144 corresponds to the effect contents determination process of S222 shown in FIG. 71, which is suitable for being executed while adjusting the origin of the focus position. Further, FIG. 145 shows a display example of an image projected by the projector device B2 according to the eleventh modification.

As shown in FIG. 144, the sub CPU 400 determines effect contents according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1131).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect contents, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1132). If the effect involves changing the focus position (S1132: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1137. If the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1132: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1133.

In S1133, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether the drift correction number is 15 times or more as a predetermined value, for example. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1133: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1134. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1133: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect content determined in the process of S1131, and ends the effect content determination process.

In S1134, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect content determined in the process of S1131, and then changes the effect content to an effect that involves changing the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to "ON" (S1135).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction counter (S1136).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests the setting change of the focus position in order to project the image while changing the focus position while temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin and performing drift correction as the effect changed in the process of S1134. Is performed (S1137). As a result, as the effect image projected from the projector device B2, for example, as shown in FIG. 145(a), the focus position once returns to the focus origin to cause so-called out-of-focus, which corresponds to, for example, an internal winning combination. The image becomes difficult to see, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145(b), by gradually adjusting the focus position to a position corresponding to the screen of the projection target, an image in which the pattern is clearly visible is displayed. ..

According to the effect content determination processing as described above, the focus position is compensated by the drift correction even when the temperature of the projector device B2 rises, and the drift error is accumulated for each drift correction. Since the focus position can be temporarily returned to the focus origin in order to project a production image that changes to a clearly visible state, it is possible to eliminate all drift errors accumulated up to that point. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the image quality deterioration due to the drift correction while using the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing the drift correction in the electric focus control.

In addition, the image shown in FIG. 145 is relatively changed from a state where the visibility is lowered due to the initial out-of-focus state to a state where the visibility is gradually improved and the visibility is improved. It is possible to provide a state in which the visibility changes due to the change of the above as the video content for production. More specifically, as such a video expression, a predetermined effect image (for example, a specific small image) that notifies the player of a lottery result such as an internal winning combination, a rare combination, a reach pattern, a jackpot pattern, etc. Images such as cherries and watermelons, numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc., images, effects, etc.) are produced with a telescope, and the initially blurred image gradually becomes clearly visible. Can be provided. At this time, since the outline and color of the projected predetermined effect image are vaguely visible to the player, when the effect accompanied by the origin adjustment is executed, the effect accompanied by the origin adjustment is, for example, 10000 ms. At the same time, if the time required for the origin adjustment in the performance is 2500 ms, for example, a common image like a treasure box is displayed for the first 1500 ms, and the remaining 1000 ms and the end of the performance (elapse of the production time for 7500 ms). The predetermined effect image described above may be displayed. By doing this, when the origin adjustment is performed and the player is vaguely grasping the outline and color arrangement, the final display content is not known, and the notification is made by the effect image when the outline becomes clear. You can also do it. In the production accompanied by the origin adjustment, at which timing within the production time, the origin adjustment is performed, for example, at the same time as the start of production in 10000 ms, during the production when 5000 ms has elapsed, or when 7500 ms has elapsed. It is possible to appropriately change the timing such as the timing according to the end of the effect depending on the effect, and the information regarding the timing of such origin adjustment may be stored in advance or appropriately changed depending on the situation. Alternatively, you may select. In addition, when the effect time is not set in advance (for example, when the identification pattern capable of displaying the game result to the player is stopped according to the operation of the operation means), a treasure box or a predetermined effect The timing of displaying the image is the operation of the operation means of the player (for example, the operation of the stop button of the reel, the operation of the operation means provided for the game machine, the operation of the lever, the operation of the payout, the operation of the lending, 1 The displayed timing may be different depending on the operation of the bet or the MAX bet, the operation of the button that can move to the standby position and the protruding position and can be pressed at any position, etc. In such a case, for example, The origin adjustment may be executed under the condition that the operation means is operated while the identification pattern is changing. Then, when it is determined in advance that the execution period of the effect of performing the origin adjustment is performed, the origin adjustment is performed on the condition that the operation means is operated, and the origin adjustment is performed and the treasure box or the predetermined effect image described above is performed. May be displayed.

FIG. 146 shows an effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the twelfth modification. The process shown in FIG. 146 corresponds to a modification of the process shown in FIG. 144.

As shown in FIG. 146, the sub CPU 400 determines effect contents according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1141).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect contents, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1142). If the effect involves changing the focus position (S1142: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1148. If the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1142: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1143.

In S1143, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether the drift correction number is 15 times or more as a predetermined value, for example. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1143: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1144. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1143: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect contents determined in the process of S1141, and ends the effect contents determination process.

In S1144, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the received command, whether or not the internal winning combination is a specific internal winning combination corresponding to a rare combination such as a so-called RT transition combination or a bonus combination. When the internal winning combination is a specific internal winning combination (S1144: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1145. When the internal winning combination is not a specific internal winning combination (S1144: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect contents determined in the processing of S1141 and ends the effect contents determining processing.

In S1145, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect contents determined in the process of S1141 and then changes the effect contents into effects involving a change in the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to "ON" (S1146).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as the initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1147).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests the setting change of the focus position in order to project the image while changing the focus position while temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin and performing drift correction as the effect changed in the process of S1145. Is performed (S1148). According to this, the content of the effect once determined according to the internal winning such as a rare combination having a relatively low winning probability is changed, and the image for the effect projected from the projector device B2 at that time is as shown in FIG. An image similar to that shown will be displayed. It should be noted that such an effect content determination process may be executed only when the number of games reaches a predetermined number without a specific internal winning combination being internally won.

Even with such effect content determination processing, the focus position can be temporarily returned to the focus origin when projecting an image for effect with a relatively low appearance frequency, and all drift errors accumulated at that time can be removed. This makes it possible to suppress image quality deterioration due to drift correction.

FIG. 147 shows an effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the thirteenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 147 corresponds to a modified example of the process shown in FIG. 144 or 146.

As shown in FIG. 147, the sub CPU 400 determines effect contents according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1151).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect contents, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1152). If the effect involves changing the focus position (S1152: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1157. When the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1152: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1153.

In S1153, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether the drift correction number is 15 times or more as a predetermined value, for example. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1153: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1154. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1153: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect contents determined in the process of S1151 and ends the effect contents determination process.

In S1154, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the effect contents determined in the processing of 1151 are effects accompanied by darkening of the image. The effect accompanied by darkening of the image means, for example, when the projection target is switched from one screen to another screen, the image is temporarily brought into a dark state at the time of the switching. If the effect is accompanied by darkening of the image (S1154: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1155. When the effect is not accompanied by darkening of the image (S1154: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect content determined in the processing of S1151 and ends the effect content determination processing.

In S1155, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to “ON” while setting the effect contents determined in the process of S1151.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as the initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1156).

Then, the sub CPU 400 makes a focus position setting change request in order to project a relatively dark image while changing the focus position while performing drift correction after temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin when the image darkens. (S1157). According to this, when the image is darkened due to the screen switching, as the image projected from the projector device B2, an image in which the out-of-focus state cannot be visually recognized is displayed as a relatively dark-looking image. .. It should be noted that such an effect content determination process may be executed only when the image is simply darkened to a predetermined level without switching the screen.

According to such an effect content determination process, the focus position can be temporarily returned to the focus origin in a specific effect state in which the image is unclear for the player in the darkness of the image, and any drift error accumulated at that time is removed. As a result, it is possible to suppress image quality deterioration due to the subsequent drift correction.

FIG. 148 shows a drift correction temperature table stored in the sub ROM substrate 42 of the sub control substrate SS, as a table according to the fourteenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the drift correction temperature table, for example, the drift correction temperature obtained through the temperature sensor B25 is effectively applied as a data value in accordance with the temperature change situation. Whether or not it is specified in a predetermined temperature range.

For example, with respect to the drift correction temperature obtained through the temperature sensor B25, when the temperature change per minute is 10° C. or more, the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value A is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature is applied as it is as the data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature. That is, when there is a relatively rapid temperature change, the drift correction temperature is valid as it is as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value.

On the other hand, regarding the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25, when the temperature change per minute is less than 10° C., the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value B is applied. According to this, when the temperature difference between the drift correction temperature and the predetermined reference temperature is detected within the range of 0°C to ±11°C, the applicable data valid value B is 0°C. , +11° C. or higher and −11° C. or lower, the data valid value B is applied as it is. That is, when the temperature change is relatively gradual, the drift correction temperature is not valid as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value unless the temperature difference from the reference temperature exceeds ±11° C. Drift correction is not performed within the temperature range where the difference is ±11°C. Note that the temperature change per minute in the present embodiment is, for example, a temperature measured at a predetermined time (for example, one minute is not limited and may be obtained by time management using a real-time clock or the like). Is added and the total value of the added temperatures is divided by the number of times of measurement, or the maximum and minimum values of the temperatures measured in a predetermined time are calculated, and the intermediate value between the maximum and minimum values and the previous drift correction are calculated. The result of comparison with the temperature at the time of performing (or the temperature at the time of turning on the power source) may be obtained as the temperature change per minute.

FIG. 149 shows projector drift correction processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as processing according to the fourteenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 149 corresponds to a modification of the process shown in FIG. 95 or FIG. 139 described above, and is partly improved as the process using the drift correction temperature table of FIG. 148.

As shown in FIG. 149, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a focus position setting change request, based on a parameter request command from the projector control board B23 (S1161). When there is a focus position setting change request (S1161: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1163. If there is no focus position setting change request (S1161: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1162.

In S1162, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, 120 (corresponding to approximately 1 minute) or more as a predetermined value. The drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, an addition counter for measuring time in order to monitor a temperature change per minute. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or larger than the predetermined value (S1162: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1163. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is less than the predetermined value (S1162: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1165.

In S1163, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the drift correction monitoring counter.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command with the projector control board B23 as the transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1164). At this time, the drift correction temperature is specified as a parameter in the status request command. Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. The command set in the process of S1164 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 of FIG. 138 described above.

In S1165, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'drift corrected temperature'. When the received command is “drift correction temperature” (S1165: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1166. When the received command is not the'drift correction temperature' (S1165: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

In step S1166, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and the position coefficient of the focus position. As described above, the position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining the optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E.

Next, the sub CPU 400 refers to the drift correction temperature table of FIG. 148 based on the temperature change per minute, and selects a valid drift correction temperature data value as the focus drift correction value (S1167). At this time, for example, when the temperature change per minute is 10° C. or more, the drift correction temperature is directly selected as the data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature. On the other hand, when the temperature change per minute is less than 10°C, the drift correction temperature is 0°C as the valid data value B if the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature is within the range of 0°C to ±11°C. If it is selected and is not less than +11° C. and not more than −11, it is directly selected as the data valid value B.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the drift correction temperature and the position coefficient selected as the data valid value (S1168). The focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature (drift correction temperature) as described above. At this time, if 0° C. is selected as the valid data value, the focus drift correction value becomes 0, and the drift correction is not performed.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S1168 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S1169). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S1169: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S1169: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1170.

In S1170, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and stores the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for requesting a setting change of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S1171).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1172).

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S1173). Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. Accordingly, when the drift correction temperature is selected as a data valid value other than 0, the drift correction of the focus position is performed.

According to such a projector drift correction process, for example, a temperature range in which the drift correction is invalid is set according to a temperature change per minute, and the drift correction may or may not be performed even at the same drift correction temperature. Yes, drift correction is appropriately performed according to the temperature change situation. Also by this, the drift error accumulated for each drift correction can be reduced as much as possible, and the image quality deterioration of the image projected from the projector device B2 can be effectively suppressed.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a drift correction temperature table stored in the sub ROM substrate 42 of the sub control substrate SS, as a table according to the fifteenth modification. This drift correction temperature table corresponds to a modification of the drift correction temperature table shown in FIG. 148.

As shown in FIG. 150, in the drift correction temperature table, with respect to the drift correction temperature obtained through the temperature sensor B25, for example, the drift according to the temperature change situation and whether or not a demo display is being performed. Whether or not the corrected temperature is effectively applied as a data value is defined in a predetermined temperature range.

For example, when the temperature change per minute of the drift correction temperature obtained through the temperature sensor B25 is 10° C. or more (in the case of temperature change a) except when the demo display is being performed, the data valid value A is set. The specified drift correction temperature applies. According to this, the drift correction temperature is applied as it is as the data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature. That is, when a predetermined image corresponding to the game state is being projected and there is a relatively rapid temperature change as, for example, an effect display other than the demo display, the drift correction temperature is a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value. Will be valid as is.

On the other hand, even when the demo display is not being performed, if the temperature change per minute of the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25 is less than 10° C. (in the case of temperature change b), the data is valid. The drift correction temperature defined as the value B'is applied. According to this, when the temperature difference between the drift correction temperature and the predetermined reference temperature is detected within the range of 0°C to ±6°C, the applied data valid value B'is 0°C. Therefore, when detected above +6°C and below -6°C, it is applied as it is as the applicable data valid value B'. That is, when the temperature change is relatively gradual except during the demo display, the drift correction temperature is effective as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value unless the temperature difference from the reference temperature exceeds ±6°C. Therefore, the drift correction is not performed within the temperature range of ±6°C.

Further, during the demo display, the drift correction temperature defined by the data valid value B is applied to the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25 regardless of the temperature change per minute. According to this, when the temperature difference between the drift correction temperature and the predetermined reference temperature is detected within the range of 0°C to ±11°C, the applicable data valid value B is 0°C. , +11° C. or higher and −11° C. or lower, the data valid value B is applied as it is. That is, during the demo display, it is not necessary to project an image with high image quality even if the drift correction is performed. Therefore, the drift correction temperature should be the focus unless the temperature difference from the reference temperature exceeds ±11°C. It is not valid as a data value for calculating the drift correction value, and the drift correction is not performed within the temperature range where the temperature difference is ±11°C.

FIG. 151 shows a demo command transmission process by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS as a process according to the fifteenth modification. The processing shown in FIG. 151 is sequentially executed in the medal acceptance/start check processing of, for example, S103 shown in FIG. 59 described above, or in sequence with each processing shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 151, the main CPU 300 determines whether a medal can be inserted (including a state where the BET button can be operated) (S1181). When it is in a state where medals can be inserted (S1181: Yes), the main CPU 300 shifts to the processing of the next S1182. When it is not possible to insert medals (S1181: No), the main CPU 300 ends the demo command transmission process.

In S1182, the main CPU 300 determines whether the error flag is “1”. The error flag is flag information for indicating whether or not there is a communication error or the like with the main control board MS or its connection board, and when there is an error, "1" is set. When the error flag is "1" (S1182: Yes), the main CPU 300 moves to the process of S1188. When the error flag is not "1" but "0" (S1182: No), the main CPU 300 moves to the next step S1183.

In S1183, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not the demo command transmission flag is “1”. The demo command transmission flag is flag information indicating whether or not the demo command can be transmitted to the sub control board SS, and is set to "1" when the demo command can be transmitted. When the demo command transmission flag is “1” (S1183: Yes), the main CPU 300 moves to the process of S1186. When the demo command transmission flag is not '1' but '0' (S1183: No), the main CPU 300 moves to the next step S1184.

In S1184, the main CPU 300 sets the initial value of the demo command transmission timer. The demo command transmission timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the standby time until the demo command is transmitted, and a numerical value corresponding to the standby time such as 30 s or 60 s is set as an initial value.

Next, the main CPU 300 sets the demo command transmission flag to "1" (S1185).

Next, the main CPU 300 subtracts 1 from the value of the demo command transmission timer (S1186).

Next, the main CPU 300 determines whether the value of the demo command transmission timer is "0" (S1187). When the value of the demo command transmission timer is “0” (S1187: Yes), the main CPU 300 moves to the next processing of S1188. When the value of the demo command transmission timer is not “0” (S1187: No), the main CPU 300 moves to the processing of the next S1188.

In S1188, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not an error such as a communication error occurs between the main control board MS and its connection board. When an error is occurring (S1188: Yes), the main CPU 300 moves to the processing of S1192. When no error has occurred (S1188: No), the main CPU 300 moves to the processing of the next S1189.

In step S1189, the main CPU 300 generates demo command data, and stores the generated demo command data in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The stored demo command data is transmitted to the sub control board SS in the data transmission process (command transmission process) of S127 shown in FIG. As a result, from the projector device B2, a demonstration image is projected as a demonstration display.

Next, the main CPU 300 sets the demo command transmission flag to "0" (S1190).

Next, the main CPU 300 sets "0" to the error flag (S1191). Then, the main CPU 300 ends the demo command transmission process.

In S1192, the main CPU 300 sets the error flag to “1” and ends the demo command transmission process. In this case, the demo is not displayed because an error is occurring.

According to the projector drift correction process using the drift correction temperature table shown in FIG. 150 depending on whether the demo display is being performed or not, the temperature range in which the drift correction becomes invalid differs depending on whether the demo display is being performed or not. While the invalid temperature range is relatively wide during the demo display, the invalid temperature range is relatively narrow or non-effective outside the demo display. That is, the frequency of drift correction is changed not only by the drift correction temperature but also by the demo display, and the frequency of the drift correction can be suppressed even if the state of the demo display becomes long, so that drift errors that accumulate for each drift correction can be generated. The image quality of the image projected from the projector device B2 can be effectively suppressed.

FIG. 152 shows the transition of the game state according to the sixteenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 152, the gaming machine 1 as a pachi-slot machine has a plurality of gaming states, and the plurality of gaming states include, as an example, a normal gaming state and a bonus gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “BB”). ), a chance zone (hereinafter referred to as “CZ”), an ART game state (hereinafter referred to as “ART”), and a chance time (hereinafter referred to as “CT”).

For example, the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a shift lottery to CZ, BB or the like is performed in accordance with an internal winning combination, and when the shift lottery is won, a shift to CZ or BB or the like is made. In this normal game state, for example, an image for effect is displayed using the front screen mechanism E1.

BB is a game state in which a so-called regular bonus is repeatedly performed until the number of paid-out medals exceeds a predetermined number, and while shifting from CZ, ART or CT according to an internal winning combination, a normal game state according to a predetermined end condition. In addition to, the lottery for adding the number of ART games and the random hitting lottery for ART are performed, and when these lottery is won, the number of ART games is increased or the game state is changed to ART. For example, in the normal game state or in BB shifted from CZ, the effect image is displayed using the front screen mechanism E1, and in BB shifted from ART, the effect image is displayed using the reel screen mechanism F1. , BB in the ART additional zone which has been moved from CT, the effect image is displayed while appropriately switching the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1.

The CZ shifts from the normal game state according to the internal winning combination, while performing the lottery to shift to CT via ART, BB, or ART, and when winning the shift lottery, the game shifts to ART, BB, or CT. It is in a state. In this CZ, for example, an image for presentation is displayed using the front screen mechanism E1.

In ART, a state in which the sub CPU 400 notifies the reel stop operation so that the internal winning combination wins or does not win advantageously for the player is called "AT", and this AT is combined with a so-called replay high probability state (RT). It is a game state controlled by. During ART, it is possible to win the internal winning combination so as to increase the number of medals to be obtained as much as possible. Therefore, as the number of ART games increases, more medals can be acquired. The ART shifts from BB, CZ, or CT in accordance with the internal winning combination, while performing the lottery for transition to BB or CT, and when winning the transition lottery, shifts to BB or CT. In this ART, for example, the fixed screen mechanism D is used to display an image for presentation. For example, in the case of transitioning from ART to CT, a game for the purpose of aligning a specific symbol combination during the replay high probability state is performed, and if a lottery that can align the specific symbol combination is won, ART It is possible to increase the number of games and the number of CT sets.

In CT, for example, the winning probability of small wins such as bells, watermelons, cherries, etc. does not change, but regardless of the internal winning win, depending on the stop operation by the so-called push of the player, any small win can be won. In the gaming state in which the reels are controlled, the maximum value of the number of sliding symbols (maximum sliding display number) is basically 1 for one or a plurality of reels during CT. By the way, in the game states other than CT, the maximum value of the number of sliding symbols is 4. While CT changes from ART in accordance with the internal winning combination, it also performs lottery for transition to ART, lottery for adding ART games, and lottery for adding CT set numbers. Or add the number of ART games and CT sets. Such CT continues for the number of games in addition to the specified number of games. In this CT, an effect image is displayed using the reel screen mechanism F1.

Thus, at the start of each gaming state, the screen to be projected by the projector device B2 is appropriately switched. Then, in particular, at the time of starting CT where an image is projected on a specific screen (reel screen mechanism F1), the focus position is temporarily returned to the focus origin and then the focus position is changed while performing drift correction. Has become. As a result, all drift errors accumulated so far are removed. Therefore, with respect to the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing the drift correction in the electric focus control, it is possible to effectively suppress the image quality deterioration due to the drift correction every time the image is transferred to CT.

It should be noted that the plurality of gaming states are not limited to these, and may include, for example, a state in which the winning probability of shifting to CZ has a high probability or a low probability in the normal gaming state, and other states. The gaming state may also include a state in which the probability of shifting to a more advantageous gaming state is different.

FIG. 153 shows a focus adjustment frequency setting table stored in the sub ROM substrate 42 of the sub control substrate SS, as a table according to the seventeenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the focus adjustment frequency setting table, the number of times of variation of the symbol after the origin adjustment (readjustment) of the previous focus position is performed depending on the case where the change frequency of the focus position is relatively high or low. Is reached 150 times or 300 times, a setting change request is made to perform the next origin adjustment. The case where the frequency of change of the focus position is relatively high corresponds to, for example, the CT described above with reference to FIG. 152, and the case where the frequency of change of the focus is relatively low is such a game state other than during the CT. Equivalent to. During CT, there is a possibility of winning the BB in the ART addition zone, so the frequency of changing the focus position is relatively high. In FIG. 153, as an example, it is determined whether or not the origin adjustment (re-adjustment) is performed on the condition of the number of symbol fluctuations. It may be defined to determine whether or not to perform the next origin adjustment, on the condition of a specific number of performance executions from a winning combination, an elapsed time from the previous origin adjustment, or the like. Further, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a so-called pseudo BB, the BB may change 150 times or more, so that the BB may be applied as a case where the change frequency is relatively high.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process of the sub control board SS according to the seventeenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 154 is a process using the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 and corresponds to a modification of the process shown in FIG. 144, 146, or 147.

As shown in FIG. 154, the sub CPU 400 determines effect contents according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1201).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect contents, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1202). If the effect involves changing the focus position (S1202: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1208. When the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1202: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1203.

In S1203, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether the drift correction number is 15 times or more as a predetermined value, for example. When the drift correction count is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1203: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1204. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1203: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect contents determined in the process of S1201, and then shifts to the process of S1209.

In S1204, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the internal winning combination is a specific small combination such as a rare small combination. When the internal winning combination is a specific small winning combination (S1204: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1205. When the internal winning combination is not a specific small combination (S1204: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1209.

In S1205, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect contents determined in the process of S1201 and then changes the effect contents to effects corresponding to the winning of a specific small winning combination involving a change in the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to "ON" (S1206).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as the initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1207).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests the focus position setting change in order to project the image while changing the focus position while temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin and performing drift correction as the effect changed in the process of S1205. Is performed (S1208). As a result, as the effect image projected from the projector device B2, for example, as shown in FIG. 145(a), the focus position once returns to the focus origin to cause so-called out-of-focus, which corresponds to a specific small win. The image becomes an image in which the pattern is difficult to see, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145(b), the focus position is gradually adjusted to a position corresponding to the screen of the projection target, so that the pattern corresponding to the specific small win is clearly seen. An image like this is displayed.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the gaming state is bonus (BB) (S1209). When the gaming state is bonus (BB) (S1209: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1210. When the gaming state is not the bonus (BB) (S1209: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1212.

In S1210, the sub CPU 400 further determines whether or not the effect mode is the effect mode of the ART addition zone during bonus. In such an effect mode in the BB of the ART additional zone, the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1 are appropriately switched, so that the frequency of changing the focus position (the number of changes) is relatively higher than that in the other effect modes (many times). )Become. Then, in the effect mode of the bonus addition ART zone (S1210: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1211. When not in the effect mode of the ART addition zone in the bonus (S1210: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1212.

In S1211, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus change frequency to “high”. That is, the case where the focus change frequency is “high” in the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 is referred to. As a result, the sub CPU 400 once again performs the origin adjustment (re-adjustment) of the focus position, and when the number of symbol variations reaches 150 times, once again returns the focus position to the focus origin by the readjustment and then performs drift correction. The image is projected while changing the focus position while performing. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the effect contents determination process.

On the other hand, in step S1212, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus change frequency to “low”. That is, reference is made to the case where the focus change frequency is “low” in the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. As a result, the sub CPU 400 once returns the focus position to the focus origin by re-adjustment when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 300 times, which is more than the previous 150 times, after performing the origin adjustment (re-adjustment) of the focus position last time. Then, the image is projected while changing the focus position while performing drift correction. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the effect contents determination process.

According to the effect content determination process using the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153, in a specific game state (effect mode) in which the frequency of changing the focus position relatively increases with screen switching, the change frequency Since there is a higher possibility that the focus position will be adjusted to the origin than in the effect mode in other game states where there is relatively little, the focus adjustment error that accumulates each time the focus position is changed is also reduced according to the frequency of changing the focus position. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the deterioration of the image quality of the image due to the focus adjustment error.

FIG. 155 shows focus origin adjustment determination processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as processing according to the eighteenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 155 corresponds to a modification of the process shown in FIG. 143.

As shown in FIG. 155, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not it is during demo shift (during demo command reception) (S1221). When it is time to shift to the demo (S1221: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1228. If it is not the time to shift to the demo ((S1221): No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1222.

In S1222, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the start of CT is the gaming state. If it is the time to start CT (S1222: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1228. When it is not the time to start CT, the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1223.

In S1223, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the setting of the member menu. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the member menu (S1223: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1228. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is not selected by the member menu, the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1224.

In S1224, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether the drift correction number is, for example, 30 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1224: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1225. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1224: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1226.

In S1225, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter. After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S1228.

In S1226, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not a condition according to the frequency of changing the focus position, that is, a predetermined condition according to the frequency of changing the focus position defined in the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 is satisfied. .. For example, if the frequency of changing the focus position is "high", and the number of symbol variations has reached 150 since the origin adjustment of the focus position was performed last time, or if the frequency of changing the focus position is "low". When the number of symbol variations has reached 300 times since the origin adjustment of the focus position was performed last time (S1226: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1227. On the other hand, even if the focus position change frequency is "high", if the previous origin adjustment or the number of symbol fluctuations has not reached 150 times, or if the focus position change frequency is "low" When the number of symbol variations has not reached 300 times (S1226: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

In S1227, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the variation counter that counts the variation of the focus position when the focus origin adjustment flag is in the “OFF” state.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to "ON" (S1228).

Next, the sub CPU 400 once returns the focus position to the focus origin and then issues a focus position setting change request to change the focus position while performing drift correction (S1229). In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores the setting change request data including the origin adjustment of the focus position in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the contents of temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin and then changing the focus position. Thus, for example, when the screen to which the image is projected is switched, the projector device B2 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the focus position setting change request data to temporarily return the focus position to the focus origin, and then respectively. It is possible to focus the projection lens 210 while performing drift correction at the focus position corresponding to the screen. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

According to such focus origin adjustment determination processing, the condition for adjusting the origin of the focus position is switched according to the frequency of change of the focus position, and the focus adjustment error can be appropriately reduced. It is possible to effectively suppress the image quality deterioration of the image.

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the projector device B2 according to the nineteenth modification and the sub CPU 400 are activated.

As shown in FIG. 156, when the communication between the projector device B2 and the sub control board SS is established at the time of starting the gaming machine 1, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 sends a start parameter request command to the sub control board SS. It transmits to CPU400. Upon receiving the command for requesting the activation parameter, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for confirming the activation parameter request to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for confirming the startup parameter request transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits an LED brightness setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the LED brightness setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B are controlled based on the LED brightness specified by the command. At this time, according to the LED brightness setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 100% brightness is designated as a default value. Upon receiving the LED brightness setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that received the reception confirmation command transmits a trapezoidal distortion correction command to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the trapezoidal distortion correction command controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the trapezoidal distortion correction value specified by the command. At this time, according to the trapezoidal distortion correction command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 40 is designated as the default value of trapezoidal distortion correction (trapezoidal distortion correction value). Upon receiving the trapezoidal distortion correction command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a white color temperature setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the white color temperature setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B are controlled based on the white color temperature designated by the command. At this time, according to the white color temperature setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 1 is designated as the default value of the white color temperature. Upon receiving the white color temperature command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a horizontal image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the horizontal image position offset setting command, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the horizontal image position offset value designated by the command. At this time, according to the horizontal image position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, the horizontal image position offset value held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set. The control LSI 230 that has received the horizontal image position offset setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a vertical image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command for setting the vertical image position offset, the control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the offset value of the vertical image position specified by the command. At this time, according to the vertical image position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, the value of the vertical image position offset stored in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set. The control LSI 230 that has received the vertical image position offset setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits the brightness setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the brightness setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B are controlled based on the brightness setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the brightness setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 50 is designated as the default brightness value. Upon receiving the brightness setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a contrast setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the contrast setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B are controlled based on the contrast setting value designated by the command. At this time, according to the contrast setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 50 is designated as the default value of contrast. Upon receiving the contrast setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a gamma setting command to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the gamma setting command controls the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B based on the gamma setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the gamma setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 1 is designated as the default value of the gamma value. The control LSI 230 that has received the gamma setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400, which has received the reception confirmation command, transmits the electric focus position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the command for setting the electric focus position offset, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the offset value of the electric focus position designated by the command. At this time, according to the electric focus position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, the electric focus position offset value held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set. The control LSI 230 that has received the electric focus position offset setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. Next, the sub CPU 400 that receives the reception confirmation command transmits a setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that receives the command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. As a result, the communication sequence at startup is completed.

As described above, at startup, the communication sequence as shown in FIG. 156 is performed as one set. There is a case where a command for requesting a start parameter is transmitted from the projector device B2 in the middle of such a communication sequence, but in this case, the sub CPU 400 discards the command. Further, the reception confirmation command transmitted from the control LSI 230 to the sub CPU 400 is retransmitted by the retry processing until it shows a correct reception result, for example, up to 10 times, if it does not show a correct reception result.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a communication sequence during normal operation between the projector device B2 and the sub CPU 400 according to the nineteenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 158, during the normal operation of the projector device B2, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 transmits a parameter request command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. Upon receiving the parameter request command, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “LED temperature (R)” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector apparatus B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "LED temperature (R)", the control LSI 230 sets the temperature detected by the first temperature sensor B25a as the LED temperature (R) and indicates the LED temperature (R) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “LED temperature (G)” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector apparatus B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 which has received the command of the status request "LED temperature (G)" sets the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b as the LED temperature (G) and indicates the LED temperature (G) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “LED temperature (B)” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "LED temperature (B)", the control LSI 230 sets the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b as the LED temperature (B) and indicates the LED temperature (B) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command “intake FAN temperature” (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request “intake fan temperature”, the control LSI 230 sends the command (see FIG. 159) indicating the intake fan temperature to the sub CPU 400, using the temperature detected by the intake air temperature sensor B26a of FAN2 as the intake fan temperature. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “FAN1 rotation speed” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request “FAN1 rotation speed”, the control LSI 230 sends the command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN1 rotation speed to the sub CPU 400, using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a of the FAN1 as the FAN1 rotation speed. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “FAN2 rotation speed” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request “FAN2 rotation speed”, the control LSI 230 transmits the command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN2 rotation speed to the sub CPU 400, using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27b of the FAN2 as the FAN2 rotation speed. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command “FAN3 rotation speed” (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230, which has received the command of the status request “FAN3 rotation speed”, transmits the command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN3 rotation speed to the sub CPU 400, using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27c of the FAN3 as the FAN3 rotation speed. To do.

After that, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request completion command for the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 having received the command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. As a result, the communication sequence during the normal operation of the projector device B2 ends.

As described above, the communication sequence at the time of normal operation as shown in FIG. 158 is performed as one set, for example, every 30 seconds after the communication sequence at startup is completed. In such a communication sequence, when the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command that does not indicate a correct reception result in response to the status request command transmitted from the sub CPU 400 to the control LSI 230, for example, the reception confirmation command is correct up to 10 times. The reception confirmation command is retransmitted by the retry processing until the reception result is shown.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a communication sequence at the time of screen switching between the projector device B2 and the sub CPU 400 according to the nineteenth modification. The screen switching here means after the screen to be projected is changed from one screen to another screen.

As shown in FIG. 160, at the time of screen switching, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 transmits a parameter request command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. Upon receiving the parameter request command, the sub CPU 400 transmits the electric focus position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. According to the electric focus position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 161, the electric focus position offset value held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set as the setting information of the changed screen. As a result, the focus position is offset-adjusted with respect to the focus origin of the changed screen. The control LSI 230 that has received the electric focus position offset setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a horizontal image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. According to the horizontal image position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 161, the value of the horizontal image position offset held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set as the setting information of the changed screen. .. As a result, the horizontal image position is offset-adjusted with respect to the changed screen. The control LSI 230 that has received the horizontal image position offset setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a vertical image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. According to the vertical direction image position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 161, the value of the vertical direction image position offset held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set as the setting information of the changed screen. .. As a result, the vertical image position is offset-adjusted with respect to the changed screen. The control LSI 230 that has received the vertical image position offset setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. Although not shown in FIG. 160, the sub CPU 400 that receives the reception confirmation command transmits a setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that receives the command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400 again. After that, the parameter request command is retransmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “drift correction temperature” command (see FIG. 161) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the command of the status request “drift correction temperature” transmits the command (see FIG. 161) indicating the drift correction temperature to the sub CPU 400, using the temperature detected by the temperature sensor B25 as the drift correction temperature.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request completion command for the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 having received the command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. Although not shown in FIG. 160, the control LSI 230 that has transmitted the command then transmits the parameter request command (see FIG. 161) again to the sub CPU 400.

After that, the sub CPU 400, which has received the parameter request command, transmits a command instructing the electric focus drift correction to the control LSI 230. As a result, in the projector device B2, the focus position offset-adjusted with respect to the focus origin is further compensated and adjusted by drift correction based on the drift correction temperature indicated by the above-mentioned command. Then, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400, the sub CPU 400 that receives the reception confirmation command transmits a setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that receives the command confirms the reception confirmation. Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400. As a result, the communication sequence when switching screens is completed.

As described above, the communication sequence at the time of screen switching is performed with the procedure as shown in FIG. 160 as one set when the screen to be projected is changed. In such a communication sequence, when the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command that does not show a correct reception result to the sub CPU 400, the reception confirmation command is retried until a correct reception result is shown, for example, up to 10 times. Will be retransmitted.

According to such a communication sequence, the focus position is offset-adjusted each time the screen is switched, and the focus position is adjusted with high accuracy by the drift correction according to the temperature. Even if the adjustment is frequently performed, it is possible to suppress image distortion and deterioration of image quality, and it is possible to continuously project a high-quality image while switching screens.

Also, since the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted each time the screen is switched, it is possible to project the image from the projector device B2 onto each screen at appropriate projection positions in the horizontal and vertical directions. The image can be corrected physically and softly.

Further, since the focus position varies depending on the temperature condition of the projector apparatus B2 although the offset adjustment is performed, it takes a predetermined time to acquire the temperature from the projector apparatus B2 in order to perform the drift correction when the screen is switched. .. That is, depending on the predetermined time period, it is assumed that the screens may be switched even while the temperature is being acquired from the projector device B2. On the other hand, according to the communication sequence at the time of screen switching described above, the offset adjustment of the horizontal image position and the vertical image position is performed after the offset adjustment of the focus position, and then the focus position is readjusted by the drift correction. Since the drift correction is finally performed in a step-by-step procedure, it is possible to suppress the image distortion with high accuracy even if the screen switching operation is frequently performed. It is possible to continuously project high-quality images.

FIG. 162 shows main control main processing executed in the main control board of the pachinko machine according to the twentieth modification.

In the pachinko machine, when the power is turned on, the main CPU of the main control board first performs an initialization process (S1231). In this process, the main CPU performs, for example, processes such as access permission to the main RAM, backup restoration, and work area initialization. Next, the main CPU performs an initial value random number update process (S1232). In this process, the main CPU updates the initial random number counter value.

Next, the main CPU performs a special symbol control process (S1233). In this process, the main CPU performs a predetermined control process regarding the progress of the special symbol game and the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device.

Next, the main CPU performs normal symbol control processing (S1234). In this process, the main CPU carries out a predetermined control process relating to the progress of the ordinary symbol game and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display device.

Next, the main CPU executes a control process of the symbol display device (S1235). In this process, the main CPU performs the display control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the normal symbol based on the execution result of the special symbol control process and the normal symbol control process.

Next, the main CPU performs a game information data generation process (S1236). In this process, the main CPU generates game information data to be transmitted to the hall computer of the game store and stores the game information data in the main RAM.

Next, the main CPU performs a storage/game state data generation process (S1237). In this process, the main CPU generates storage/game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control board of the pachinko machine based on the value of the probability variation flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage/game state data in the main RAM. To do. After that, the main CPU returns to the processing of S1232 and repeats the above-described processing of S1232 and thereafter.

FIG. 163 shows a system timer interrupt process executed in the main control board of the pachinko machine according to the twentieth modification.

In the pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU interrupts the main processing at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt processing even while the main processing is being executed. Specifically, the main CPU executes a system timer interrupt process as shown in FIG. 157 according to the clock pulse generated from the reset clock pulse generation circuit in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms).

As shown in FIG. 157, the main CPU saves the data (information) in each register (S1241). Next, the main CPU performs a random number update process (S1242). In this processing, the main CPU updates various random number values extracted from the big hit determination counter, the symbol determination counter, the hit determination counter, the falling determination counter, the variation pattern determination counter, the effect pattern determination counter, and the like. ..

It should be noted that the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter lack fairness when the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, the big hit determination counter and the symbol determination counter are updated at a periodic timing of, for example, 2 ms to ensure fairness.

Next, the main CPU performs a switch input detection process (S1243). In this process, the main CPU detects winning or passing through various starting openings, various winning openings, and a ball passage detector.

Next, the main CPU performs a timer update process (S1244). Specifically, the main CPU has various timers such as a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control board and the sub-control board and a special winning opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening. Perform update processing.

Next, the main CPU performs a command output process (S1245). In this processing, the main CPU transmits various commands such as a winning command, a variation command, and a demo command to the sub CPU of the sub control board. For example, for the demo command, it will be transmitted when a predetermined time elapses without a game ball being fired after the change of the special symbol ends.
(For example, it is transmitted when the game is not being played for 3 minutes or more.

Next, the main CPU performs a game information output process (S1246). In this process, the main CPU outputs various information related to the game processed by the main control board, the sub control board, the payout/launch control circuit, etc. to the hall computer or the like of the game shop.

Next, the main CPU restores the data of each register saved in S1241 (S1247). After that, the main CPU ends the system timer interrupt process.

Even in such a pachinko machine, by installing the projector device B2 or the like, the same effect as that of the pachi-slot machine described above can be exhibited.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, the pachi-slot machine and the pachinko machine have been described as typical examples of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, for example, an enclosed gaming machine. Further, the general-purpose technology can be applied to various gaming machines such as gaming machines and slot machines in addition to the gaming machines mentioned above.

Further, it is needless to say that the numerical values, information, constituent elements and the like shown in the above embodiment are merely examples and can be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention. For example, a value or a number may include 0, and may include a minus or plus value.

For example, in the present embodiment, various conditions include the number of counts and the number of executions, and there is a process of determining the number of executions and the execution time (execution period) that is the period of execution. It is not something that will be done. For example, if the condition is that the process is executed three times or more, the condition may be that the process is executed once or more, or 0 or more times depending on the initial value. This is a predetermined condition that the number of times of execution is set to be three times or more, and when determining whether or not it has been executed three times or more, from a software point of view, it is basically determined whether or not it has been executed. Since it suffices to be able to make a decision, the condition is to decide whether it is 1 or 0 in the information theory (code theory). On the contrary, the same is true in the case where it is judged whether or not it is not executed, and it is judged whether it is 0 or 1 in the information theory (code theory).

In other words, determining whether or not execution is performed is synonymous with determining whether the binary value corresponding to the execution unit is 1 or 0. When this is executed, the flag is set to "ON", and the flag is set to "ON". Even when it is determined whether or not it is “ON”, as a result, whether or not there is a signal input for setting the flag to “ON” (whether or not the signal is received once or a plurality of times is input. Whether or not there is an output, whether or not it is output, etc.). Therefore, even when determining the presence/absence of a flag, the number of executions itself is not counted, but it is synonymous with the determination of the number of executions (counts, counting results, interrupts, etc.) as a unit. The determination of the flag and the determination of the number of times can be performed by essentially the same comparison calculation process.

The same applies to the case of determining the time. For example, in the case of determining the execution time, it is synonymous with determining whether the binary value corresponding to the execution time is 1 or 0. And can be performed by a simple comparison operation process. However, in the case of making a determination using a flag or a variable, it may be determined to be present when the value is 0 by negative logic, and may be determined to be absent when the value is 1.

Further, when the gaming machine is started up, the pack light may be turned off until communication is established so that the afterimage phenomenon does not occur in the sub liquid crystal display device, for example.

In addition, since the movable screen is not returned to the standby position during error notification, the error notification image may be projected in accordance with the screen that is the projection target at that time.

Further, the projector device of the present embodiment is configured to be able to perform projection on a plurality of screens, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projector device may be a single screen or a plurality of screens. It only needs to be able to project onto any screen. Further, the projection target is not limited to the screen, and may be, for example, an accessory, a board, a front panel, an outer frame, a main frame, a cabinet, an upper plate, a lower plate, a player, a ceiling above the gaming machine, or a passage from the gaming machine. Various projection forms such as projection toward the target are conceivable. Further, as the projection method, various methods such as so-called rear projection, front projection, rear projector that reflects projection light, and front projector that reflects projection light can be applied. However, it is possible to combine a plurality of these different methods.

Further, the intake fan and the exhaust fan in the present embodiment are ventilation means capable of performing ventilation inside the projector apparatus by rotating those constituent parts. That is, the ventilation means includes an intake means or an exhaust means, and the control for the intake means (shutdown, warning condition, etc.) in the present embodiment is applicable to the exhaust means, and The control can also be applied to the intake means.

Based on the above-described embodiments, the outline of the present invention will be listed below as supplementary notes.

(About Appendix A)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may be blurred or image noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected along with the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of avoiding a malfunction of a projection device and eliminating discomfort in an image.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix A1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image and a control unit (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) for performing control related to an effect. ,
The projection device is
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.),
Ventilation temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the ventilation means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a),
When the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature, a transmitting means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) which transmits error information which is information indicating an abnormality to the control means, Equipped with
The control means, when receiving the error information, makes a response to the error information to the projection device,
The projection device further includes an operation stopping unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that stops an operation in operation when receiving a response to the error information.

According to such a configuration, for example, when the temperature near the ventilation means of the projection device rises above a predetermined temperature as the operating time increases, error information indicating an abnormality is transmitted to the control means and Since the operation in operation is forcibly stopped in response to the response from the control means, it is possible to avoid a malfunction due to heat accumulation in the projection device and eliminate the discomfort of the image that would last for a long time.

(Appendix A2)
As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The operation stopping means may stop the operation in operation when a predetermined time elapses without a response to the error information from the control means after the transmitting means transmits the error information.

With such a configuration, even if the temperature exceeds the predetermined temperature and there is no response from the control means to the error information, the operation in operation is automatically stopped after the predetermined time elapses. It is possible to surely avoid the malfunction due to.

(About Appendix B)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may be blurred or image noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected along with the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating an uncomfortableness of an image by appropriately determining a malfunction of the projection device in advance and appropriately avoiding the malfunction. And

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix B1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projection device is
Optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD 241 etc.),
An internal temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting a temperature near the optical means,
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.),
Ventilation temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the ventilation means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a),
Abnormality determination means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 or the like) for determining an abnormality when the temperature detected by the internal temperature detection means is equal to or higher than the first temperature;
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detection means is equal to or higher than the second temperature higher than the first temperature, or the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detection means is equal to or higher than the third temperature, the operation is in progress. An operation stopping means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for stopping the operation of
The second temperature is set higher than the third temperature.

According to such a configuration, for example, the temperature near the optical means rises as the operating time becomes longer, so that it is determined to be abnormal when the temperature becomes higher than the first temperature, and the temperature near the optical means further rises to reach the second temperature or higher. Or when the temperature around the ventilation means becomes equal to or higher than the third temperature, which is lower than the second temperature, the operation in operation is stopped. Therefore, the operation failure due to the heat accumulation of the projection device is determined in advance and appropriately avoided. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the image that would take a long time.

(About Appendix C)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may be blurred or image noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected along with the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating an uncomfortableness of an image by appropriately determining a malfunction of the projection device in advance and appropriately avoiding the malfunction. And

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix C1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projection device is
A first optical means (for example, an LED light source 240R or the like) and a second optical means (for example, an LED light source 240B or 240G) for projecting an image;
A first internal temperature detecting means (for example, a first temperature sensor B25a) for detecting the temperature of the first optical means,
Second internal temperature detecting means (for example, second temperature sensor B25b) for detecting the temperature of the second optical means,
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.),
Ventilation temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the ventilation means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a),
If the temperature detected by the first internal temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than the first temperature, or if the temperature detected by the second internal temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than the second temperature, it is abnormal. An abnormality determining means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that determines that there is;
When the temperature detected by the first internal temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than the third temperature which is higher than the first temperature, or when the temperature detected by the second internal temperature detecting means is higher than the second temperature. When the temperature becomes higher than the fourth high temperature, or when the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means becomes higher than the fifth temperature, the operation stopping means (for example, the projector control board B23 of the projector control board B23 is stopped. Control LSI 230, etc.),
The first temperature is set higher than the fifth temperature, and the second temperature is set higher than the first temperature.

According to such a configuration, for example, as the operating time increases, heat is accumulated in the projection device, so that the temperature near the first optical unit is equal to or higher than the first temperature or the temperature near the second optical unit is increased. When the temperature is equal to or higher than the second temperature which is higher than the first temperature, it is determined to be abnormal, and the temperature in the vicinity of the first optical unit is further increased to the third temperature or higher, or the temperature in the vicinity of the second optical unit is increased to the fourth temperature. When the temperature becomes higher than the temperature or the temperature around the ventilation means becomes higher than the fifth temperature, which is lower than the first temperature, the operation in operation is stopped. Therefore, after the malfunction of the projection apparatus due to heat accumulation is determined in advance, It is possible to avoid it as appropriate and eliminate the discomfort of the video that extends for a long time.

(About Appendix D)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may be blurred or image noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected along with the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a game machine capable of avoiding an operation defect of a projection device in advance and appropriately avoiding the operation error to eliminate discomfort in an image. To aim.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix D1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A projection device (for example, the projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image, a display means (for example, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or the like) capable of displaying information, and a control means (for example, the sub control board SS) for performing control relating to performance. Etc.) and a gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine 1 etc.),
The projection device is
Optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD 241 etc.),
An internal temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting a temperature near the optical means,
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.),
Ventilation temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the ventilation means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a),
A first abnormality determining unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 or the like) that determines that the temperature is a first abnormality when the temperature detected by the internal temperature detecting unit is equal to or higher than a first temperature;
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than a second temperature higher than the first temperature, or the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than a third temperature different from the second temperature. In the case of, a second abnormality determination means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for determining the second abnormality,
Equipped with
The control means is
In response to the first abnormality, the projection device is caused to project the first information, and the display means is caused to display the first information,
In response to the second abnormality, the display unit displays second information different from the first information, and responds to the projection device.
The projection device further includes an operation stopping unit (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that stops the operation in operation when receiving the response from the control unit.

According to such a configuration, when the temperature near the optical unit becomes equal to or higher than the first temperature due to the accumulation of heat in the projection device as the operating time increases, the image related to the first information is projected and displayed. At the same time, an image related to the first information is separately displayed, and when the temperature near the optical means rises to reach the second temperature or higher, or when the temperature near the ventilating means rises to the third temperature or higher, the second information is responded accordingly. The image related to the information is displayed, and the operation in operation is forcibly stopped by the response from the control means. As a result, malfunctions due to heat buildup of the projection device can be avoided in advance after being informed by the first information and the second information after that, and the discomfort of images that lasts for a long time can be eliminated. it can.

(About Appendix E)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may be blurred or image noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected along with the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating an uncomfortableness of an image by appropriately determining a malfunction of the projection device in advance and appropriately avoiding the malfunction. And

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix E1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projection device is
Optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD 241 etc.),
An internal temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting a temperature near the optical means,
An intake means (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2)) for performing intake,
An exhaust means for exhausting (for example, an exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), etc.),
An intake air temperature detecting means (for example, an intake air temperature sensor B26a) for detecting a temperature near the intake air means,
An exhaust temperature detecting means (for example, an exhaust temperature sensor B26b) for detecting a temperature near the exhaust means,
If the temperature detected by the internal temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than a first temperature, or if the temperature detected by the exhaust temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than a second temperature, an abnormality determining means for determining an abnormality ( For example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23),
When the temperature detected by the internal temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than a third temperature higher than the first temperature, or the temperature detected by the intake air temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than a fourth temperature, the operation is in progress. An operation stopping means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for stopping the operation of
The second temperature is set higher than the fourth temperature, and the first temperature is set higher than the second temperature.

According to such a configuration, for example, heat accumulates in the projection device as the operating time increases, so that the temperature near the optical unit is higher than the first temperature or the temperature near the exhaust unit is lower than the first temperature. When the temperature becomes equal to or higher than 2 temperatures, it is determined to be abnormal, and when the temperature near the optical means further rises to the third temperature or higher, or when the temperature near the intake means becomes the fourth temperature or lower, which is lower than the second temperature, the operation is in progress. Since the operation is automatically stopped, the operation failure due to the heat accumulation of the projection apparatus can be determined in advance and appropriately avoided, and the discomfort of the image for a long time can be eliminated.

(About Appendix F)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may be blurred or image noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected along with the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately avoiding a malfunction of the projection apparatus depending on the situation and eliminating the discomfort of the image. ..

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix F1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projection device is
An exhaust fan (for example, an exhaust fan 245 (FAN3) etc.),
A first intake fan (for example, an intake fan 244A (FAN1)),
A second intake fan (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.) different from the first intake fan;
A temperature detecting means (for example, an intake air temperature sensor B26a) for detecting the temperature of a predetermined location,
Exhaust gas rotation speed detection means (for example, a pulse sensor B27c or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the exhaust fan,
First intake rotation speed detection means (for example, a pulse sensor B27a or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the first intake fan;
Second intake rotation speed detection means (for example, a pulse sensor B27b or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the second intake fan;
An operation stopping unit (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) that stops the operation in operation when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting unit becomes equal to or higher than the first temperature,
The operation stopping means,
When the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is equal to or lower than the second temperature lower than the first temperature, and the rotation speed detected by the exhaust rotation speed detection means is less than the first rotation speed, the operation is in progress. When the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is higher than the second temperature, the rotation speed detected by the exhaust rotation speed detection means is higher than the first rotation speed. If it is less than, stop the operation in progress,
When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is equal to or lower than the second temperature and the rotation speed detected by the first intake air rotation speed detecting means is less than the second rotation speed, the operation is in progress. When the operation is stopped and the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is higher than the second temperature, the rotation speed detected by the first intake rotation speed detecting means is higher than the second rotation speed. If the speed is less than the number of revolutions, stop the running operation,
Regardless of the temperature detected by the temperature detection means, when the rotation speed detected by the second intake rotation speed detection means becomes less than the second rotation speed, the operation during operation is stopped. And

With such a configuration, when the temperature near the predetermined location becomes equal to or higher than the first temperature due to, for example, heat accumulation in the projection apparatus as the operating time becomes longer, the operation in operation is stopped while the first operation is stopped. Even if the temperature is lower than the temperature, the operation during operation is stopped according to the rotation speed of the exhaust fan or the first intake fan based on the second temperature, and if the temperature is lower than the first temperature, the second intake fan is irrespective of the temperature. Since the operation in operation is stopped depending on the number of revolutions of the projector, malfunctions due to heat accumulation in the projection device are avoided as appropriate depending on the temperature and the number of revolutions of the fan, eliminating the discomfort of images that last for a long time. can do.

(About Appendix G)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may be blurred or image noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected along with the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately avoiding a malfunction of the projection apparatus depending on the situation and eliminating the discomfort of the image. ..

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix G1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projection device is
A first ventilation fan (for example, an exhaust fan 245 (FAN3) or the like) for performing ventilation,
A second ventilation fan (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2)) that performs ventilation unlike the first ventilation fan,
Ventilation temperature detecting means (for example, intake air temperature sensor B26a) for detecting the temperature near the second ventilation fan,
First rotation speed detecting means (for example, a pulse sensor B27c or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the first ventilation fan,
Second rotation speed detecting means (for example, a pulse sensor B27b or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the second ventilation fan,
An operation stopping means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for stopping the operation in operation,
The operation stopping means,
When the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detecting means is equal to or lower than the first temperature and the rotation speed detected by the first rotation speed detecting means is less than the first rotation speed, the operation in operation is performed. When the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detection means is higher than the first temperature, the rotation speed detected by the first rotation speed detection means is higher than the first rotation speed. If it is less than, stop the operation in progress,
Regardless of the temperature detected by the ventilation temperature detection means, when the rotation speed detected by the second rotation speed detection means is less than the second rotation speed, the operation in operation is stopped. And

According to such a configuration, for example, heat accumulation occurs in the projection device as the operating time becomes longer, so that the projector is in operation depending on the temperature in the vicinity of the second ventilation fan and the rotation speed of the first ventilation fan. While the operation is stopped, the operation in operation is stopped according to the rotation speed of the second ventilation fan irrespective of the detected temperature. It is possible to avoid the discomfort of the video for a long time by appropriately avoiding it depending on the number.

(About Appendix H)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may be blurred or image noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected along with the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately avoiding a malfunction of the projection apparatus depending on the situation and eliminating the discomfort of the image. ..

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix H1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projection device is
A first ventilation fan (for example, an exhaust fan 245 (FAN3) or the like) for performing ventilation,
A second ventilation fan (for example, an intake fan 244A (FAN1), etc.) that performs ventilation unlike the first ventilation fan,
A temperature detecting means (for example, an intake air temperature sensor B26a) for detecting the temperature of a predetermined location,
First rotation speed detecting means (for example, a pulse sensor B27c or the like) for detecting the rotation speed of the first ventilation fan,
Second rotation speed detecting means (for example, a pulse sensor B27a) for detecting the rotation speed of the second ventilation fan,
An operation stopping means (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for stopping the operation in operation,
The operation stopping means,
When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is equal to or lower than the first temperature, and the rotation speed detected by the first rotation speed detecting means becomes less than the first rotation speed, the operation in operation is stopped. In addition, when the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is higher than the first temperature, the rotation speed detected by the first rotation speed detection means is lower than the second rotation speed higher than the first rotation speed. If it becomes, stop the operation in progress,
When the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is equal to or lower than the first temperature, and when the rotation speed detected by the second rotation speed detecting means is less than the second rotation speed, the operation in operation. When the temperature detected by the temperature detection means is higher than the first temperature, the rotation speed detected by the second rotation speed detection means is higher than the second rotation speed. It is characterized in that when it is less than the above, the operation in operation is stopped.

According to such a configuration, for example, heat accumulation occurs in the projection device as the operating time increases, so that the projector operates according to the detected temperature and the rotation speeds of the first ventilation fan and the second ventilation fan. Since the inner operation is stopped, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projection apparatus can be appropriately avoided according to the temperature and the rotation speed of the fan, and the discomfort of the image for a long time can be eliminated.

(About Appendix I)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may be blurred or image noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected along with the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of avoiding the operation failure of the projection device and then avoiding it, thereby eliminating the discomfort of the image. And

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix I1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, a projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image and a control unit (for example, a sub-control board SS or the like) for performing control related to an effect. ,
The projection device is
Optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD 241 etc.),
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.),
An optical abnormality detecting unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for detecting an abnormality of the optical unit,
Ventilation abnormality detecting means for detecting abnormality of the ventilation means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23),
A power supply abnormality detecting means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for detecting an abnormality relating to the power supply,
Initialization means for performing initialization at startup (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23),
An abnormality processing means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for performing abnormality processing using a watchdog timer,
Equipped with
When an abnormality is detected by at least one of the optical abnormality detection means, the ventilation abnormality detection means, and the power supply abnormality detection means, information regarding the abnormality is given to the control means before performing processing corresponding to the abnormality. And send
Information relating to the abnormality with respect to the control means in the initialization processing executed by the initialization means after the abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing means, or after the initialization processing is executed. Is transmitted.

According to such a configuration, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the optical unit, the ventilation unit, or the power source of the projection device, the information corresponding to the abnormality is transmitted to the control unit, and then the process corresponding to the abnormality is performed. On the other hand, when the abnormality processing is performed using the watchdog timer, the projection device is initialized and the information regarding the abnormality is transmitted to the control means, so that the malfunction of the projection device is surely notified. It is possible to avoid the unpleasantness of the image, which can be avoided for a long time.

(About Appendix J)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may be blurred or image noise may occur due to thermal deformation. Due to such a malfunction of the projection device, there is a possibility that the image projected along with the game may be uncomfortable.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine capable of avoiding a malfunction of a projection device in a reliable and prompt manner and avoiding the discomfort of an image. With the goal.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix J1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A projection device (for example, the projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image, a display means (for example, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or the like) capable of displaying information, and a control means (for example, the sub control board SS) for performing control relating to performance. Etc.) and a gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine 1 etc.),
The projection device is
Optical means for projecting an image (for example, LED light sources 240R, 240B, 240G, DMD 241 etc.),
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an intake fan 244B (FAN2), etc.),
An optical abnormality detecting unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for detecting an abnormality of the optical unit,
Ventilation abnormality detecting means for detecting abnormality of the ventilation means (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23),
A power supply abnormality detecting means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for detecting an abnormality relating to the power supply,
Initialization means for performing initialization at startup (for example, control LSI 230 of projector control board B23),
An abnormality processing means (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23) for performing abnormality processing using a watchdog timer,
Transmitting means for transmitting information to the control means at predetermined time intervals (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, etc.),
Equipped with
The transmitting means is
When an abnormality is detected by at least one of the optical abnormality detection means, the ventilation abnormality detection means, and the power supply abnormality detection means, information regarding the abnormality is given to the control means before performing processing corresponding to the abnormality. And send
Information relating to the abnormality with respect to the control means in the initialization processing executed by the initialization means after the abnormality processing is executed by the abnormality processing means, or after the initialization processing is executed. And send
The control means causes the display means to display information indicating an abnormality when the information is not received from the projection device for a time longer than the predetermined time interval.

According to such a configuration, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the optical unit, the ventilation unit, or the power source of the projection device, the information corresponding to the abnormality is transmitted to the control unit, and then the process corresponding to the abnormality is performed. On the other hand, when the abnormality processing is performed using the watchdog timer, the projection device is initialized, information regarding the abnormality is transmitted to the control means, and the projection is performed even if a time longer than the predetermined time interval has elapsed. If no information is received from the device, information indicating an abnormality of the projection device is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to reliably and promptly notify the malfunction of the projection device and then avoid it, and eliminate the discomfort of the image that would last for a long time.

(About Appendix K)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may become unclear due to thermal deformation of the image, or the focus may be out of focus even if the focus is adjusted. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing image quality deterioration due to temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort in images.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix K1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projection device is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210),
Temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the temperature near a predetermined location,
A focus control unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, or the like) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the focus control means temporarily returns the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference state and then controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection means. ..

According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even when the temperature of the projection device changes, and further, the drift error accumulated for each drift correction is set to the predetermined reference state when the focus mechanism satisfies the predetermined condition. Since it is removed by returning to step 1, the image quality deterioration of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated.

(About Appendix L)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may become unclear due to thermal deformation of the image, or the focus may be out of focus even if the focus is adjusted. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing image quality deterioration due to temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort in images.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix L1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projection device is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210),
Temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the temperature near a predetermined location,
A focus control unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, or the like) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit,
When the number of times the focus mechanism is controlled reaches a predetermined number of times, the focus control unit temporarily returns the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference state, and then the focus detection unit according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit. It is characterized by performing control.

According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even if the temperature of the projection apparatus changes, and further, the drift error accumulated for each drift correction is adjusted when the number of times the focus mechanism is controlled reaches a predetermined number. Is removed by returning to a predetermined reference state, it is possible to effectively suppress the image quality deterioration of the image projected through the focus mechanism and eliminate the discomfort of the image.

(About Appendix M)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may become unclear due to thermal deformation of the image, or the focus may be out of focus even if the focus is adjusted. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing image quality deterioration due to temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort in images.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix M1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projection device is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210),
Temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the temperature near a predetermined location,
A focus control unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, or the like) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit,
The focus control unit reduces the visibility of the predetermined image by performing control for temporarily returning the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference state while projecting a predetermined image from the projection device. The first state is set, and then the focus mechanism is controlled in accordance with the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit to set the second image in which the visibility of the predetermined image is higher than at least the first state. Is characterized by.

With such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even when the temperature of the projection device changes, and further, drift errors accumulated for each drift correction are corrected by the focus mechanism while the predetermined image is projected. Since it is removed by returning to step 1, the image quality deterioration of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated. In addition, as the predetermined image, for example, the first state in which the focus is initially out of focus and the visibility is lowered is relatively changed to the second state in which the focus is gradually improved and the visibility is improved. It is possible to provide a state in which the visibility is changed as a video content for production.

(About Appendix N)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may become unclear due to thermal deformation of the image, or the focus may be out of focus even if the focus is adjusted. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing image quality deterioration due to temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort in images.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix N1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine provided with a projection device capable of projecting an image (for example, the projector device B2 and the like) and identification information display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (for example, reels RL, RC, RR, main display window DD4 and the like). (For example, a gaming machine 1 or the like),
The projection device is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210),
Temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the temperature near a predetermined location,
A focus control unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, or the like) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit,
When the number of times that the identification information is variably displayed by the identification information display unit reaches a predetermined number, the focus control unit temporarily returns the focus position of the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference position and then detects the temperature by the temperature detection unit. The focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature that has been set.

According to such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even if the temperature of the projection apparatus changes, and further, the drift error accumulated for each drift correction is focused when the number of times that the identification information is fluctuated and displayed reaches a predetermined number. Since the position is removed by returning to the predetermined reference position, the image quality deterioration of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be eliminated.

(About appendix O)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may become unclear due to thermal deformation of the image, or the focus may be out of focus even if the focus is adjusted. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing image quality deterioration due to temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort in images.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix O1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projection device is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210),
Temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the temperature near a predetermined location,
A focus control unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, or the like) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit,
The focus control unit controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit after temporarily returning the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference state while projecting a darkened image through the focus mechanism. It is characterized by performing.

With such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even when the temperature of the projection device changes, and further, the drift error that accumulates for each drift correction causes the focus mechanism to have a predetermined reference state during projection of a darkened image. Since it is removed by returning to, the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, and the discomfort of the image can be suppressed in a darkened image in which the behavior of the focus mechanism is difficult to see. It can be resolved.

(About Appendix P)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may become unclear due to thermal deformation of the image, or the focus may be out of focus even if the focus is adjusted. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing image quality deterioration due to temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort in images.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix P1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projection device is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210),
Temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the temperature near a predetermined location,
A focus control unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, or the like) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit,
The focus control means has a predetermined temperature range for invalidating the control of the focus mechanism, which is regulated to be changeable in accordance with a temperature change per predetermined time based on the temperature detected by the temperature detection means, Only when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is outside the predetermined temperature range, the focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature.

With such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even when the temperature of the projection device changes, and in particular, a predetermined temperature range (a temperature range in which the drift correction becomes invalid) is changed according to the temperature change per predetermined time Is changed, the drift correction is not always performed depending on the temperature situation. As a result, for example, the drift error accumulated for each drift correction can be reduced as much as possible, and the image quality deterioration of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, thereby eliminating the discomfort of the image. be able to.

(About Appendix Q)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, for example, heat tends to accumulate inside the projector main body as the operating time becomes longer, so that a defect due to heat occurs in the optical components and the substrate provided inside the projector main body, and the plastic lens The image may become unclear due to thermal deformation of the image, or the focus may be out of focus even if the focus is adjusted. That is, as the temperature change of the projection device becomes larger, the image quality of the image projected with the game tends to gradually deteriorate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing image quality deterioration due to temperature change of a projection device and eliminating discomfort in images.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix Q1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A game machine (for example, game machine 1 or the like) including a projection device (for example, projector device B2 or the like) capable of projecting an image,
The projection device is
A focus mechanism for projecting an image (for example, the focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210),
Temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the temperature near a predetermined location,
A focus control unit (for example, a control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, a sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, or the like) that controls the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit,
The focus control means invalidates a control of the focus mechanism that is variably defined depending on whether a demo image is being projected or not, and a second temperature narrower than the first temperature range. Only when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is out of the first temperature range during projection of a demonstration image having a range, the focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature, while the demo is performed. During projection of an image other than the image, only when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is outside the second temperature range, the focus mechanism is controlled in accordance with the temperature.

With such a configuration, the focus mechanism is controlled by, for example, drift correction even when the temperature of the projection device changes, and in particular, in the temperature range in which the drift correction is invalid, relative movement is performed depending on whether a demo image is being projected. By changing the wide first temperature range and the relatively narrow second temperature range, the drift correction is not always performed depending on the temperature and the image being projected. As a result, for example, the drift error accumulated for each drift correction can be reduced as much as possible, and the image quality deterioration of the image projected through the focus mechanism can be effectively suppressed, thereby eliminating the discomfort of the image. be able to.

(About appendix R)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, for example, the focus may be greatly deviated as the frequency of focus adjustment is increased, and the image quality of an image projected with the game may be gradually deteriorated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing image quality deterioration according to the frequency of focus adjustment and eliminating image discomfort. ..

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix R1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
Of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the reflection surfaces of the reflection sections D1 to D4, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.), a projection device (for example, the projector device B2, etc.) capable of projecting an image; A projection surface driving mechanism (for example, front screen driving mechanism E2, reel screen driving mechanism F2) that switches by displacing at least one projection surface (for example, projection surface E11a, projection surface F1a, etc.) relative to the projection device. Etc.) and a gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 etc.),
The projection device is
A focus mechanism (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210) for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces,
Focus adjusting means for adjusting the focus mechanism each time at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces is switched by the projection surface drive mechanism (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS). Etc.) and
A first projection mode in which the frequency of switching the projection surface is a predetermined frequency, and a second projection mode in which the frequency of switching the projection surface is less than the first projection mode.
If the predetermined condition is satisfied, the focus adjusting means returns the focus mechanism to a predetermined focus reference position and then performs the readjustment, and performs the readjustment in the first projection mode more than in the second projection mode. It is characterized by an increased frequency.
Note that the projection mode includes, for example, a mode of image projection by the projector device B2, and may be a production mode in a game. The frequency of focus position adjustment depending on the game (production mode, game mode, etc.), and the screen It is also possible to change the control content of the projector drift correction processing when the frequency of changing the positions of the projection surface E11a and the projection surface F1a changes.

According to such a configuration, in the first projection mode in which the frequency of the focus mechanism adjustment (focus adjustment) is relatively high with the switching of the projection plane, the frequency is more predetermined than the second projection mode in which the frequency is relatively low. Since the frequency of returning to the predetermined focus reference position and readjusting more frequently according to the condition of (3), the focus adjustment error accumulated for each focus adjustment can be reduced according to the frequency of the focus adjustment, and the focus mechanism can be It is possible to effectively suppress the image quality deterioration of the image projected through the image, and it is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the image.

(About appendix S)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, for example, the focus may be greatly deviated as the frequency of focus adjustment is increased, and the image quality of an image projected with the game may be gradually deteriorated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing image quality deterioration and eliminating image discomfort even when focus adjustment is frequently performed. And

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix S1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
Of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the reflection surfaces of the reflection sections D1 to D4, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.), a projection device (for example, the projector device B2, etc.) capable of projecting an image; A projection surface driving mechanism (for example, front screen driving mechanism E2, reel screen driving mechanism F2) that switches by displacing at least one projection surface (for example, projection surface E11a, projection surface F1a, etc.) relative to the projection device. Etc.) and a gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 etc.),
The projection device is
A focus mechanism (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210) for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces,
Focus adjusting means for adjusting the focus mechanism each time at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces is switched by the projection surface drive mechanism (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS). Etc.),
An internal temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor B25 or the like) for detecting the internal temperature,
The focus adjustment means adjusts the focus position of the focus mechanism based on preset offset information every time the projection plane is switched, and the focus adjustment means adjusts the focus according to the temperature detected by the internal temperature detection means. The feature is that the focus position is adjusted by the mechanism.

With such a configuration, the focus position is adjusted based on the offset information each time the projection plane is switched, and at that time, the focus position is adjusted with high accuracy by, for example, drift correction according to the temperature. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the image quality and eliminate the discomfort in the image even if the focus adjustment is frequently performed in the situation where

(Appendix S2)
As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The projection device is
An image position changing unit (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, etc.) capable of changing the position of the image projected on the projection surface is provided
The image position changing unit adjusts the position of the image to be projected based on the position information in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction each time the projection plane is switched.

With such a configuration, since the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted each time the projection surface is switched, the projection position of the image on each projection surface can be set appropriately.

(About Appendix T)
Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device for displaying video images for games (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-35066 and 2009-240459). reference). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the angle of view may be greatly shifted each time the screen (projection surface) is switched, and the appearance of the projected image may be gradually changed with the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine capable of projecting an image at an appropriate position by switching the projection surface and eliminating discomfort of the image. The purpose is to do.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(Appendix T1)
A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
Of the plurality of projection surfaces (for example, the reflection surfaces of the reflection sections D1 to D4, the projection surface E11a, the projection surface F1a, etc.), a projection device (for example, the projector device B2, etc.) capable of projecting an image; A projection surface driving mechanism (for example, front screen driving mechanism E2, reel screen driving mechanism F2) that switches by displacing at least one projection surface (for example, projection surface E11a, projection surface F1a, etc.) relative to the projection device. Etc.) and a gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1 etc.),
The projection device is
An image position changing unit (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, etc.) capable of changing the position of the image projected on the projection surface is provided
The image position changing unit adjusts the position of the image to be projected based on the position information in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction each time the projection plane is switched.

With such a configuration, since the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted each time the projection plane is switched, the projection position of the image on each projection plane can be set appropriately. The discomfort of can be eliminated.

(Appendix T2)
As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The projection device is
A focus mechanism (for example, a focus mechanism 242 of the projection lens 210) for projecting an image on each of the plurality of projection surfaces,
Focus adjusting means for adjusting the focus mechanism each time at least one of the plurality of projection surfaces is switched by the projection surface drive mechanism (for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS). Etc.) and
When the projection plane is switched, the position of the image to be projected is adjusted by the image position changing unit, and then the focus position is adjusted by adjusting the focus mechanism by the focus adjusting unit. To do.

With such a configuration, when the projection plane is switched, the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted, and then the focus position of the focus mechanism is adjusted, so that the horizontal and vertical directions are adjusted. It is possible to suppress deterioration of image quality not only by the position of, but also by the focus position.

(About others)
As a game machine, for example, a pachinko game machine is known (see, for example, JP 2013-13801 A). However, this pachinko gaming machine does not have a function as a gaming machine provided with the projector device according to the present invention, so that it is not possible to improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine provided with a projector device that can improve interest.

1 Gaming Machine G Cabinet G4 Top Wall A Display Unit B1 Projector Cover B12 Top Wall B2, X, X', X" Projector Device B20 Power Supply Circuit B21 Lens Unit B22, X22 Case B23 Projector Control Board B25 Temperature Sensor B25a First Temperature Sensor B25b Second temperature sensor B26a Intake temperature sensor B26b Exhaust temperature sensors B27a to B27c Pulse sensor 210 Projection lens 230 Control LSI
240R, 240G, 240B LED light source 241 DMD
242 Focus mechanism 242A Rack member 242B Lead screw 242C Focus motor 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, 243Xa, 243Xc Heat sink 244A, 244B Intake fan 245 Exhaust fan 400 Sub CPU
401 SRAM
700 MCU
710 Multi-output scaler LSI
2430, 2431 Heat sinks D1 to D4 Reflecting portion E11a Projection surface (movable projection surface)
F1a Projection surface (movable projection surface)
E2 Front screen drive mechanism F2 Reel screen drive mechanism MS Main control board SS Sub control board SK Scaler board RD Reel drive board DS Door relay board FC1 First optical fiber cable FC2 Second optical fiber cable DD19 Sub liquid crystal display device DD19T Touch panel

Claims (1)

A gaming machine provided with a projection device capable of projecting an image and identification information display means capable of variably displaying identification information,
The projection device is
A focus mechanism for projecting images,
Temperature detection means for detecting the temperature near a predetermined location,
Focus control means for controlling the focus mechanism according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection means,
When the number of times that the identification information is variably displayed by the identification information display means reaches a predetermined number, the focus control means temporarily returns the focus position of the focus mechanism to a predetermined reference position and then detects the temperature by the temperature detection means. A gaming machine, characterized in that the focus mechanism is controlled according to the temperature that has been set.

Images